Home

SERVICE MANUAL 7045

1. sw Be Default values Japan U S A Europe 0 Operation when key counter is removed Ignore Instantaneous stop Jam 0 1 1 when using as 1 A3 11 x 17 counting method Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0 BU 2 0 0 0 3 Selection of maximum number of copies that 1 0 0 0 4 can be stapled by FNS Normal paper 0 0 0 5 Selection of maximum number of copies that 2 0 0 0 6 be stapled by FNS Thick paper 0 0 0 7 FNS limit on number of stapled sets None Temporary stop after 25 sets of copy 3 0 0 0 0 Toner replenish stop timing 4 Decide with SW 3 2 Stop after paper exited 0 0 0 1 NE 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 SW2 4 EE 0 0 0 5 1 shot message display at automatic staple mode clearing 5 Yes No 1 1 1 6 0 0 0 7 Prohibition of non image area erases repeat auto Yes 0 0 0 and original position correction 0 Use size for Latin America destination No Yes 0 0 0 1 F34 F35 F36 latch 6 No Yes 0 0 0 2 Toner replenish stop timing 2 4 When copying ends Interval between copy set 0 0 0 3 Return to screen after copying reservation 7 Yes 0 0 0 BS 4 0 0 0 5 By pass feed non standard size selection 8 Size detection effective Non standard size handling 0 0 0 6 0
2. ACAUTION A PRECAUCION gt portions otherwise A ATTENTION A ATTENZIONE UIA you may be injured AVORSICHT A ERE 0 L5 7 ce eV This area generates 1 aS high voltage If touched electrical dz ert shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH A CAUTION ATTENTION VORSICHT PRECAUCION ATTENZIONE N CAUTION This internal area is very hot To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH N CAUTION If you carry out work on the machine without reading these warning labels an unexpected accident may occur resulting in possible blindness DO NOT REMOVE these warning labels Do not remove caution labels If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled clean the label If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed please contact your Service Centre SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS lt Read section gt TE A WARNING Unplug the machine before removing platen glass A DANGER D brancher le copieur abant de retirer la vitre d exposition VAN A WARNUNG Vor Entfernen des Vorlagenglases Netzstecker ziehen
3. 25 ADJUSTMENT SW Default values No Japan U S A Europe 0 Copy paper priority in image area 15 Non image area erase Images on whole page in the 1 1 1 platen mode only 1 Automatic restart after feeding paper 16 Does not restart Restarts 0 0 0 2 8 5x11APS Japan Europe MAPS U S A 17 Yes No 1 0 0 SW7 3 Nonstandard size switch for platen APS 1 Copy on the selected Copy on the minimum size 0 0 0 8 nonstandard size B6 A5 5 5x8 5 4 Nonstandard size switch for platen APS 2 on the selected Copy on A4 8 5x11 size 0 0 0 18 nonstandard size 5 Password request for 25 36 47 mode 191 Yes 0 0 0 6 Selecttion of A series size European version Yes 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Changing of key operator fixed magnification setting Permit Prohibit 1 0 0 2 Disabling copying when PM count reached 20 Permit Prohibit 0 0 0 3 Adjusting of LCD contrast to help screen No Yes 0 0 0 SW8 4 Priority tray when APS is released 21 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 Collecting data 25 Mode 22 Yes 0 0 0 0 Selection of copy quantity limit 23 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 SW9 4 m 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 P81 messages Messages displayed on 24 0 0 0 machines installed in convenience stores 7 0 0 0 0 Summer time setting for weekly timer 25 0 0 0 1
4. Drum shaft Dust proof glass Write Mirror unit Mirror Dust proof glass Insert hand from here Drum shaft DRUM UNIT DRUM UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Drum Unit NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Caution 1 Do not shake the drum unit up and down side to side or repeatedly move back and forth when removing or installing and handle it slowly keeping it horizontal to its axis Caution 2 When removing or installing the drum unit pull out the drum coupling shaft that is on your side and work with the lock mechanism fixed in place Caution 3 When installing the drum unit clean the drawer connector on the back side of the drum unit with the blower brush Caution 4 After installing the drum unit back into the main unit rotate the charge cleaning knob back and forth about 2 times Caution 5 When removing the drum unit be sure to place the drum cover over it and store the drum carriage in a dark place Be careful not to rotate the drum when installing or removing the drum unit If you rotate the drum in the direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates during a copy operation you risk damaging the cleaning blade Caution 6 Removal procedure Open the front door loosen the one set screw release the lock pla
5. 1 34 No Menu No Sub menu Circular menu Summary of operation 2 Timing adjustment 5 Centering Centering adjustment ADU common Print the SGU patters No 16 after making adjustment Centering adjustment ADU L an adjustment Centering adjustment ADU M Centering adjustment ADU S Centering adjustment ADU SS Centering adjustment Platen Centering adjustment RADF face side The same as 36 mode 8 RADF Adjustment Centering adjustment RADF back side 6 Image read point Planten adjustment After making an adjustment make copy adjustment 7 Restoring standard Drum clock adjustment Reset the adjustment data in the same data Restart timing adjustment condition as they were when the machine Paper loop adjustment left the factory Lead edge timing adjustment Centering adjustment Read point adjustment 3 Running mode 1 Intermittent copy None After making a selection carry out operation mode 2 Paperless intermittent copy mode 3 Paperless mode 4 Paperless endless mode 5 Running mode 6 Cartridge set mode 4 Test pattern print None None Print the SGU pattern according to the specification No 5 Density adjustment pe Test pattern density None After making an adjustment print adjustment the specified SGU pattern 6 Image quality adjustment 1 PWM gamma Dmax correction Perform the Dmax correction and register the correction Patch result the in t
6. LCD PSWB SW2 EER ED OND 74 LOH 73 1 61 OB INVB 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 6 7 MU 403 404 405 RS232C FOR KRDS CN501 Board to Board Connector 120pin DIMM MAX 128Mbytes GND 9240509999000 gt gt gt 503 CN503 DIMM Socket 144pin 5 m iz NM UE LUN UN NS EE E E EEE 11 71 1 505 Neno 222 22 998858005408082599950828980025099 552 gt gt 511 lt gt gt 8550 gt gt 8858 gt 458 gt gt 88508848 gt gt 00 gt gt DIMM MAX 128Mbytes 0 Sene 92899999990059999099 gt gt gt gt 504 CN504 DIMM Socket 144pin nr GENE 55 N mesma m mon2z2z2200 So So UU eme VDO kdo gos Veo OO SC Sr 150200 9090850099 04085050005590059095050050057 0942 0207 44990009025900009000990090299 292552272222242205455528900505555529222252085 29040220222090255055528925525555 PRMB VATI 2 507 1 MEMORY B
7. turned OFF within certain period after the scanning of the duplex original front side include the simplex original has been started Causes Jam clearing method tion code 5 Fixing J34 1 528 reversal detection 1 is not The main body is stopped Open the exit door Paper exit turned ON within certain period after immediately and remove the ADU PS29 fixing exit has been turned ON jammed paper and J34 2 PS28 reversal detection 1 is not turned close it OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J34 3 PS1 paper exit is not turned ON within Open the front door a certain period after M501 ADU paper and remove the e feed has been turned ON when the jammed paper and paper is reverse ejected close it 5 34 4 PS1 paper exit is not turned OFF Open the exit door within certain period after it has been and remove the lt turned ON when the paper is reverse jammed paper and ejected close it 8 J34 5 PS30 reversal detection 2 is not turned OFF within certain period after it has been turned Others J50 1 When 516 registration is turned on Open the main body print requirement signal is not sent conveyance door DB within the certain time conveyance door or J50 2 When the start button is on S valid front door and remove does not turn on within the certain time the jammed paper and J50 3 E Whe
8. CN Pin No Signal name Description Output timing Kind of signal 1 DC24V Key counter power Always 24 V 300 mA source 2 C K SIG Key counter con 35 nection recognition 3 C K GDN Signal ground 4 C K DRIVE Key counter signal 100 ms L signal that is output after the count up copy is exited 5 P GDN Power ground 1 Vender Copy Copy in progress Output from when the Start button is Open collector 5 V signal pressed until the copy is exited 200 mA 2 Vender FEED Paper feed signal 100 ms L signal that is synchronized with the main body tray DB 3 Paper size 0 Paper size signal Signal output after paper size is altered 4 Paper size 1 36 5 Paper size 2 6 Paper size 3 7 Vender two Two sided copy se Signal output only when duplex sided copy lect signal mode is selected 8 CPF SIG 0 CPF mode select Signal output after copy mode or printer 9 CPF SIG 1 signal mode is selected 10 P GND Power ground 2 N 9 DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY This section explains howto disassemble andreassemblethe machine When disassembling and reassembling the machine follow the precau tions given below 1 2 Be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the wall outlet The disassembled parts must be reassembled following the disas sembly procedure in reverse unless otherwise specified Care should be taken
9. 1 B 1 Main 1 1 2 Drum Toner Recycle Drive 1 B 2 3 Developing Drive 1 B 3 4 By pass Paper Feed 1st Paper Feed Drive 1 B 4 5 ADU Drive ice 1 B 5 6 Reversal Paper Exit Drive 1 B 6 7 Read Unit Drive 1 B 7 8 Toner Supply Drive 1 B 8 2 UNIT EXPLANATION EXTERNAL 2 2 1 1 2 1 DRIVE SECTION sse 2 B 1 1 2 B 1 2 Mechanisms 2 B 1 3 M Main Control 2 B 2 4 M4 Drum Control 2 B 3 READ SECTION isinsin 2 C 1 1 Composition 2 C 1 2 Mechanisms 2 C 1 3 2 Scanner Control 2 C 2 4 Exposure Control 2 4 5 Original Read Control 2 C 5 6 5 2 6 5 7 AE Gontrol ntt 2 C 7 WRITE UNIT csi 2 D 1 1 2 D 1
10. 1 31 13 Root Counter Display 1 31 14 Setting 1 31 96 os 1 32 1 Setting Method 1 36 2 High Voltage Adjustment 1 36 3 Timing Adjustment 1 38 4 Running Test Mode 1 48 5 Test Pattern Output 1 49 6 Density Adjustment 1 56 7 Image Quality Adjustment 1 56 8 Hist Print asit 1 63 9 Adjustment of RADF 1 64 47 MODE nr 1 78 1 47 Mode Setting Method 1 78 2 Initial Setting in the Field 1 79 3 Drum Count 1 79 4 RADF Original Size Detection Adjustment 1 79 5 E RDH Memory Check 1 80 6 RADF Sensor Adjustment 1 80 7 Input Check code List 1 81 8 Output Check code List 1 83 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 1 87 1 Centering Adjustment 1 87 2 Adjusting the Inclination of the Paper Tray DB 608 1 88 3 Image Distortion Adjustment
11. Fixing temperature sensor 2 Fixing temperature sensor 1 b 1 Reinstallation procedure Fix the fixing temperature sensor 2 with the two set screws then contact the sensor surface to the fixing roller upper Set screws Fixing temperature sensor 2 FIXING UNIT 2 Fix the fixing temperature sensor 1 TH1 with the two set screws Set the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig be tween the fixing temperature sensor 1 and fixing roller upper then adjust the clearance between the sensor and the fixing roller upper is within the standard value with the two set screws UN JJ temperature sensor 1 Fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Set the distance between the fixing roller up per and fixing temperature sensor 1 so that it is equal to the thickness of the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Fixing temperature sensor 1 lt gt st Fixing roller upper Standard 0 9 0 15 Coat the set screws of each sensor with paint Insert the connector pins of each sensor into applicable position of the connector CN390 The reminder of the installation procedure is in the opposite sequence to removal 3 K 8 10 Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat TS NCaution After reinstalling the thermostat check that the wiring is not touching with the fixing roller upper NGauti
12. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST SERVICE Tool No Description Shape Quantity Remark Temperature sensor 55GAJGO1 position adjusting jig 1 for fixing RADF position adjusting ji 120A1052 p 919 SD 1 set 2 pieces set 7050K002 position 2 adjusting jig 00 6 2 00 Door switch jig 1 00VD 5000 New pyramid chart fo 1 Y Instelled below 55GA2025 Drum support tool 1 the total Note counter in the front door 120A9711 ADJ chart 1 120A9712 White chart 22 1 Note 55GA2025 drum support tool is screwed to the inside of the main body front panel left Application Makes it possible to rotate the drum with the drum cartridge removed from the main body 4 13 SERVICE Tool No Description Shape Quantity Remark 00VC 2 00 Drum cover lt gt 1 00VD 1000 Blower brush OQO 1 00 1004 Tester 1 00 1004 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 7045 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING MC2 Developing MC M4 HV1 Drum motor High voltage unit 1 M2 Scanner motor 1 SCDB Main motor Scanner drive board PS1 Paper exit PS SD5 Gate SD FM3 Main body cooling fan M3 Developing motor M6 1st paper feed motor M12 HV2 Reversal paper exit motor High voltage unit 2 DCPS1 02 power supply unit 1 1st paper feed SD LBR Leak breaker PS31
13. 2 H 1 3 Toner Level Detection Control 2 H 3 CLEANING TONER RECYCLE UNIT 2 1 1 Composition 2 1 1 2 Mechanisms 2 1 1 PAPER FEED UNIT nett dete 2 1 Composition 2 4 1 2 Mechanisms 2 J 2 3 Paper Feed Control 2 J 3 4 Paper Up down Control 2 J 5 5 Paper Size Detection Control 2 J 6 6 No Paper Detection Control 2 J 7 FIXING UNIT 2 K 1 Composition 2 1 2 Mechanisms 2 K 1 3 Fixing Temperature Control 2 K 2 REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION 2 L 1 Composition 2 L 1 2 Mechanisms 2 L 1 3 Reversal Paper Exit Control 2 L 3 ADU SEGTION tere eg 2 M 1 1 Composition 2 M 1 2 Mechanisms 2 M 1 3 Conveyance Control 2 M 3 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL 2 N 1 1 Parts Through Which Current Flows When the Main Switch is Turned OFF eed 2 N 1 2 Parts That Operate When the Power Switch is Turn
14. TDS output voltage Toner supply time 1 99 V or lower 0 sec 2 00 to 2 09 V 0 24 sec 2 10 to 2 17 V 0 48 sec 2 18 to 2 27 V 0 72 sec 2 28 to 2 34 V 0 96 sec 2 35 to 2 42 V 1 20 sec 2 43 V or higher 1 80 sec Signals Input signal TONER ANG SIG TDS to PRDB An analog voltage proportional to the toner density is output Output signals TDS CONT PRDB TDS TDS toner density sensor output voltage adjustment signal Output veltage range 3 to 8 V M11 A A PRDB to M11 M11 toner supply 2 drive control signal 2 G 5 DEVELOPING UNIT DEVELOPING UNIT 6 Dmax Control 5VDC SGND CONT CLK LOCK SIG DRUM TH 5VDC DRUM TH 12VDC IF 519 1 519 2 SGND Dmax control is carried out by the TCSB toner control sensor board M4 drum M3 developing and so on These parts are controlled by the PRDB printer drive board 2 Operation Dmax control is intended to align the maximum density for each machine with the reference level Contents of implementation Latent images are created several times at the maximum exposure the images are developed while the rotational speed of the sleeve is varied then each density is read by the PD1 Dmax senser on the TCSB The rotational speed of the sleeve when the density reaches the reference level is memorized as the optimum sleeve speed then subsequently developing is carried out
15. 2 6v vzs 1 10 ENIA 8v ZNIA Lyze o g _ LIN 2 5 9v 25 300W sv 26 1704 v ON9 S zv AS 1 2 Appendix 4 MOTOR BY PASS DETECTION DETECTION VR PAPERSIZE PAPER SIZE SENSOR BY PASS SENSOR NO FEED OPEN CLOSE SENSOR DETECTION BY PASS PAPER FEED UNIT REGISTRATION CLUTCH HUMIDITY SENSOR NO FEED 2ND FEED UNIT SENSOR REGISTRATION SENSOR DEVELOPING CLUTCH 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 5 7 CB 219 AS dl L18 NOW 018 dO 6 8 OND S 8 8 isd dORBd 8 330 4510 9 9 QNO S S 8 510 dO Zlv aNo si LIV axy dog 01 514 dod 6 v 5 8 dO 9 v v 105 9278 v v 1 V OND S z v 091 1 v zo co to e 3 4 2 216 1 BIXDISP OFF 213 1 IBIX2 2 2 9 9 9 VEE 9 BILCD DO 10 Pl 11 P 12 8 Di D2 D3 V LCD VEE 13 14 YOLINOW 5 SNLY ONLY LNVOS 9NVOS SNVOS NYOS 5 2 25 INVOS 0 25 5 MS ans 5 INMd NO ANI AST Appendix 5 evo wus
16. 11 times RADF Every 100 000 copies or prints 9 90090 e e 969 DF 315 Periodic check M 5 times Every 200 000 copies or prints y DB 208A Maintenance E a 6 6 6 6 6 e 6 6 6 ttiimes 1 tray Every 100 000 copies or prints Maintenance DE e o 11 times DB 208 Every 100 000 copies or prints T m9 P ENT y Periodic check il 5 times Every 200 000 copies or prints Maintenance DB 608 Every 100 000 copies or prints 0200 000 UM 1 tray LCT Periodic check p ji 4 n m Every 200 000 copies or prints Maintenance 6 FNS Every 100 000 copies or prints FS 109 Periodic check 6 n EN Every 300 000 copies or prints SERVICE 2 1 Maintenance Items Main body Every 100 000 copies or prints No Classification Service item Implementation classification Clean ing Lubri cation Replace ment Check Supply Material used Tools used Preparation Image check BS External parts Check of adjustment value Dmax and correction error Fixing unit Fixing unit removing Upper cover removing Drum unit Drum unit removing Drum unit check Charging corona unit removing Charging
17. 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 8 Serial number key 3 Serial number screen Press the key corresponding to the desired item on the screen 4 Serial number screen Enter the 9 digit serial number from the alphabet and numeric keys on the screen and then press the key to enter the number that has been entered 5 Press the RETURN key to return to the serial number setting menu screen 6 When changing the serial number of other item repeat steps 3 to 5 7 Press the RETURN key to return to the 25 mode menu screen Note When pressing the key without pressing the key the setting is complete However the new serial number will not be entered and the serial number setting screen will return 1 30 25 ADJUSTMENT 10 Displaying the ROM Version Display ROM version mounted to the machine 1 ROM version viewing method In the 25 mode menu screen select 9 ROM version then the ROM version display screen will appear The item name and ROM version are displayed on the ROM version display screen Each serial number is displayed at the right side of each item When there is no option not installed the applicable position is a blank ROM version display System control Image control Panel Optical control RADF Finisher NOOR OD Option tary When the optional printer are installed its ROM versions wi
18. FS 109 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips head Tension gauge 2 Adjustmentz method Note Perform this adjustment for tray 2 3 if you remove or replace the tray 2 motor M810 or the tray 3 motor M811 Tray 2 3 Set screw Tension gauge Tension belt Motor mounting plate 7 Dr m ai Tension gauge 2 3 Step Operation procedure 1 Temporarily fixed the set screws of the tray motor 2 Insert tension gauge into the tray clearance and hook it onto the motor mounting plate 3 1 93 Pull the tension gauge in the horizontal direction and fix the screws at the point where the reading on the tension gauge is 1 kgf 0 1 kgf Standard value Belt tension 1 kgf 0 1 kgf ISW ISW DESCRIPTION OF ISW ISW In System Writer is a process of updating the control programs stored in flash ROM mounted on various control boards in a Konica digital copier without isolating the boards from the copier Running ISW enables you to upgrade control programs without replacing the boards and maintain the boards during their replacement Tools available for running ISW include ISW Trns PC software which connects a personal computer PC to the digital copier and ISW Tool which is a dedicated tool using EPROM These tools can be plugged into the ISW connector of the degital copier to directly update the control programs in flash ROM assembled in the unit This chapter focuses on
19. Press the SET key and then press the RETURN key to set the entered number The screen will return to the KRDS setting menu screen Note that the telephone number setting copier and telephone number setting Host1 must be performed Refer to 5 Calling time set menu mode Arbitrary for the Host 2 Do not care Host 3 Step Operation procedure Enter the 25 mode 25 mode menu screen Press 10 KRDS setting key KRDS setting screen Press the 3 KRDS TEL No setting key KRDS TEL No setting screen Enter telephone number 15 digit or less consisting of number and alphabet with numeric keys Press the NEXT BACK key to change the screen then telephone number up to 3 patterns Press the SET key Press the RETURN key to end the setting KRDS 8 Calling KRDS set up lt Auto set up gt In the host call setting call the designated host computer in the set date and time and transmit each data of the copier Refer to the separate KRDS Host Application Manual for details of the data being handled 1 Screen selection Select the 10 KRDS setting in the 25 mode menu screen to display the KRDS setting screen Then select the 4 KRDS software SW set to display the KRDS software SW set screen Check that the software SW 33 0 is set to 0 After checking press the RETURN key to
20. 3 C 5 READ SEGTION 13 Remove the exposure unit from the main body frame while rotating it to the left 14 Disconnect the connector 28 from the L1 inverter L1 INVB 15 Remove the one set screw then remove the lamp cord from the exposure unit 3 6 Reinstallation procedure Open the front door and open the toner supply unit Remove the one set screw holding the front door belt on the left side Remove the six set screws and disconnect the three connectors CN59 210 211 then remove the operation panel Set screw Operation panel Connector CN211 Connector CN59 Set screws Set screw Front door belt 4 5 Install the exposure unit to the main body Install the front and rear mounting pieces of the expo sure unit in the slit of the exposure unit then temporarily fix them with four set screws each Set screws 7 Exposure unit mounting piece rear Set screws S Exposure unit mounting piece front Move the V mirror unit to the paper exit side then insert the two optics position adjusting jigs into the exposure unit mounting position from the front At this time pass through the optics position adjusting jigs into each unit and fasten the exposure unit and V mirror unit 6 V mirror unit Paper exit side Optics position adjusting jigs Fasten the exposure u
21. 5 RADF scanning density adjustment When the original glass 1 is replaced adjusts the density when reading the original with the RADF Before preforming this adjustment be careful of the following items The mechanical adjustment optical adjustment and electrically adjustment of the scanner were completed Clean the original glass 1 The white chart is not dirty or folded Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 8 RADF adj key 3 RADF adj screen Press the 5 RADF Scan density adj key 4 RADF Scan density adj screen Set the white chart on RADF Note 1 5 Press the START 6 Cheek that the Completed will apper in the message display area 7 If the then Error will appears in the message display area then repeat above steps 4 and 5 Note 2 8 Press the RETURN to return to the RADF adj screen NOTE1 Be sure to set the white chart orientation to the orientation of A4 NOTE2 If ERROR is displayed repeatedly there is a possibility in the adjustment of the scanner machine optics electric related or parts defect 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 1 Description Items Serial number indication ROM version indication Version of flash ROMs Copy count Collecting data 1 Total count and count during the specified period by mode Checking counters
22. 5 ES SEU 8 yi i f on z ui Wr el ET AC DRIVE 35 SEG 3 10 8 FT2 6 WHT nc GS 0 gt GE BG 250 car 250 JIWHT Br BT3 FTIO 116 TERED BT WHT 250 lt 250 GRY 12 DRIVE GRY BLK BLK 250 TT TN Eb au 3 GE2 G82 1 GEJ UO UL Ue 1 8760 64 390 08 DB bec 5 TRC2 CE2 WHT WHT HEATER 187 SI 5 CE TE tt L3 DRIVE 39 3 380 07 WHT WHT prz n PTC 398 for DCPS 1 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 2 7 POLYGON MOTOR Zo z 82 LIV a8 MOL E 2 ER oq Eu 1 58 8 ED X3o01 z Nv4 OLV ZU T E z 3 NVA 1 22 EG 82 amp 88 CO ga X0T7LANV4 6 e 4 d vw ano m 8a ano Q Be lt sa lt 3 ovs ua 9 ane 5 OVI 80 vv N 80 EV ND anos zv dWv128 M Y anos V auozi v SIS 8 AL ER v AS QN9S v 13538 xs N3S 145 SE oas 8 34O0 NO dWvi 2 8
23. Changeover of display during operation Job No display Original quantity display ojojo OF OF 0 0 ojojo OF CO OF 0 O0 J O OCO o ojojo OF 0 OF Job start and changeover without print Without process stop Process stop process stop 36 Adjustment of leading edge position of reverse 37 side image for image rotation Note values larger than the frame erasure dimensions are ignored SW25 Image leading edge position adjustment for 37 platen memory SW26 jo jo jo 25 ADJUSTMENT 51 FNS stapling upper limit Ordinary paper Mode 1 3 1 4 50 sheets 0 0 45 sheets 1 0 40 sheets 0 1 35 sheets 1 1 2 Upper limit of number of sheets thick paper that The following switch settings are related SW2 5 1 shot message display at automatic staple mode clearing can be stapled with FNS Mode 6 5 6 6 20 sheets 0 0 15 sheets 1 0 25 sheets 0 1 10 sheets 1 1 3 FNS limit on number of stapled sets If this bit is set to 1 then if the user specifies more than 25 stapled sets the copier automatica
24. Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj key Timing adj screen Press the Paper loop adj key Paper loop adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired adjustment item appears in the message display area Press the COPY Basic screen Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the start button to print the SGU pattern Check the skewing condition Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the paper loop adj screen Paper loop adj screen If the paper feed loop amount is not correct enter a value from the numeric keys then press the key to store the adjustment value Input range 127 small to 00 standard to 127 large 1 step 0 21mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the paper feed loop amount becomes appropriate 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the RETURNI key to return to the timing adj screen 1 43 Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj key Timing adj screen Press the 3 Paper loop adj key Paper loop adj screen Press the NEXT key until RADF appears in the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Se
25. 1 Turn on the main and sub power switches 2 Press the P button and wait until the message Please enter Service password appears Input 9272 as the password and press the Start button The password is fixed and cannot be changed Mode Select Menu Screen Press the key of the mode to be selected on the screen To return to the Mode Change Menu Screen keep pressing the P button until the screen appears When the adjustment ends press 6 EXIT key and the basic screen will appear ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF COUNT VALUE WITH P MODE The P mode enables to display of the following 1 How to Use P Mode parameters by using the P button 1 Turn on the SW1 main power and SW2 sub power to display the basic screen Press the P button The P mode screen appears and the total count value appears Total count Total count start date Note 1 PM count PM count limit Note 2 PM count start date Note 2 Printer count Note 3 When an option is installed the counter values for Scanner count Note 3 the printer and scanner also appear Drum count Note 2 The counter that appears differs depending upon Development count Note 2 the installed option 4 f you press the check button on the P mode screen service related counters that indicate the Note 1 Displayed only when address 22 7 of 1 PM count and so on appear Software switch setting in the 25 mode is
26. 10 Communications error due to generation of carrier OFF Redial repeat reception standby 11 Dial tone is not detected within 5 seconds after setting of Check connection of telephone x2 and x4 commands line K00 12 Busy signal detected Redial 13 No tone detected for 5 seconds after input of amp command Redial repeat reception standby 01 00 DTR went to OFF or in OFF state Check modem power source Check RS 232C cable connection 01 01 Cannot open RS 232C Turn power on copier OFF and ON 01 02 Cannot close RS 232C Turn power on copier OFF and ON 01 03 Response time out from RS 232C task Check modem power source Check RS 232C cable connection K02 00 AT command error Turn power on copier OFF and ON Possibility of modem malfunction or software bug K02 01 Initializing NG MODEM Check modem power source Example Modem initializing command no good Check RS 232C cable connection 3 18 SERVIGE Main Precautions for Maintenance 1 Points to be confirmed before maintenance Before starting maintenance ask a user and collect information about troubles oc curred on the machine before the mainte nance and the conditions of the machine to grasp key points for the maintenance Copy sample Be sure to make copy samples at the start and the end of maintenance for checking images Drum 1 Never expose the drum to the sunlight Be also careful not to expose drum to indo
27. 28 IL dd S NS ca mm 55 5593555556 3N ofa RENSE 595999990 ad TITT NS 2185 58 END 5185 END SN Elg sis d 28 8 1 1598 8 5 karve Aes E r 4 t r Ti E a E t 8 a T I Tam ATT SN Age 5 VANT 5 V 5 SK by BN Ey AUR buf Yop ood ftH i4 258 ON 18 G1AVTID 08 1 134 628 154 28 2 154 928 szav 129 8 194 8 5 i 8 o5 205502 55 0806 T 123785 to Board Connector 124pin Bi Centro lav 124 ON SLAvTIdd CN2 Board 380418 7135A 9ZAV Appendix 7
28. ADVERTENCIA Desenchufe la m quina antes de quitar el vidrio NAVVERTIMENTO Estrarre la spina dalla presa prima di rimuovere il vetro di esposizione Write unit DANGER DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN RAYON LASER INVISIBLE LORS DE L OUVER AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM TURE EVITER L EXPOSITION DIRECTE VORSICHT m UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG Rated Output Power lt EL WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET SmW E L B RKD flic D NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN 770 795nm LIUC CAUTION You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from Do not remove caution labels If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled clean the label If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed please contact your Service Centre xiii SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS A CAUTION ATTENTION ES A PRECAUCION A CUIDADO acruron CAUTION LA ATTENTION To avoid injury when the Finisher Er middle exit tray DO NOT INSERT W moves up and your finger into down DO NOT the two staple Q PUT your hand into driving portions 2 the two portions of or into the the closing area grooves of the paper exit lever otherwise you may be injured FS 109 Finisher N CAUTION If you carry o
29. Double feed prevention unit 6 Reinstall the by pass double feed prevention rubber in the opposite sequence to removal Caution Check that the mounting orientation of the by pass double feed prevention rubber is correct PAPER FEED UNIT 6 Replacing the Feed Rubber and Paper Feed Rubber Procedure Pp Remove the paper feed unit Remove the one stop ring and bearing 3 While pulling out the paper feed shaft remove the separation roller from the paper feed roller unit Feed rubber Separation roller Paint mark Paper feed shaft Bearing Stop ring Swing shaft Paper feed roller unit 4 Removethe stop ring then pull out the guide shaft in the direction of the arrow and remove the paper feed roller Paper feed rubber Paper feed roller Guide shaft Stop ring 3 J 4 Remove the feed rubber from the feed rubber Remove the paper feed roller from the paper feed rubber Reinstall the above parts in the sequence to remobval Caution 1 Check that the mounting orientation of each roller rubber is correct Caution 2 Install each roller rubber so that the swing shaft gets under the paper feed roller unit 7 Removing and Reinstalling the Double Feed Prevention Roller a Procedure 1 2 Remove the paper feed unit Remove the double feed pressure spring from the double feed preventio
30. t 8 22 g Y T p ONIN Sev 4 LU x SF AGL 22 n 8 t 2 v LLI and 1 eo 89 3WoH 140 8 1 gt I 5 QNo S vig zz usa s 5 our gt 50 9 2 1 e 5 ASTSdv 8 22 fviva sev 8 v 58 and s 18 22 ASCSdv t 5 29 wivd 64 8 v m 55 218 22 E AS AND 5 XNLZ 5 018 5 gt 007114 ATOdB 6 8 5 AS 1N02 A104Bl 8 8 22 3001703 5 1N02 ce 9 80 gt GXLA 80 ea g xus 80 ADOT Td A10d 105 199 A0d 193135 Sd 11 84 S RR 1 2_ dvi Sd IN VIN S 5 3 9 5 s 2 v v 8 NH m 5 AS va z 9 m 1a 1T va WV or anos org es 2 onos s le 5 AE and 8 48 INASA THA Pad ui O34W 48 9 8 x 918S2 9Zv 2 s 8 REV axus Wdg v 8 tand HV E 0385 t 8 12 z 2 8 qnvA 400 PE 50052 92 os uam 1 8 aus n0 XX 5 ONASA xus 400 91 ovi oiv Ou 100 aNd SIV GXLA 300 2NASCAWd ilv 6 v X INAS HNA ELV DM INAS Hd 21 193135 8 12 0385 5 OND 11 SN gt 544 Pans Das ANS 8 v V 8 v
31. 3 K 8 REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION 3 L 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Reversal and Paper Exit Unit 3 L 1 ADU SECTION iiti nee de 3 M 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the ADU CONTENTS SERVICE SECTION 1 ADJUSTMENT HOW USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION 1 1 1 Construction 2 1 1 ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS 1 1 LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS 1 2 MODE SELECT MENU 1 3 1 Setting Method 1 3 CHECK OF COUNT VALUE WITH P MODE 1 4 1 How to Use P Mode 1 4 25 esI RIDERE 1 5 1 Setting Method 1 6 2 Setting Software SW 1 6 3 Paper Size Setting 1 17 4 PM Count Setting 1 18 5 Collecting 1 19 6 Parts 1 24 7 Password Setting 1 28 8 Setting Phone Number of the Service 1 29 9 Setting the Serial Number 1 30 10 Displaying the ROM Version 1 31 11 KRDS 1 31 12 ISW
32. Conveyance section Conveyance guide plate upper Paper feed section Entrance guide plate upper 2 M 2 Paper exit section Exit guide plate upper 3 Conveyance Control ADU SECTION 5VDC SGND M501 DRIVE M501 CLOCK M501 H L M501 LOCK PGND 24VDC 24VDC MC501 DRIVE 24VDC MC502 DRIVE 24VDC MC503 DRIVE SGND LOOP PS 5VDC ADU SET SIG Conveyance takes place as a result of the transmission of drive power from M501 ADU paper feed to conveyance roller A from MC503 ADU feed to conveyance roller B from MC502 ADU loop to roller C and from MC501 ADU restart to the registration roller MC501 MC502 and MC503 are driven by the PRDB printer drive board Related signals are PS501 ADU no feed PS502 ADU registration and PS28 reversal detection 1 1 Operation a Paper feed control When PS28 is turned OFF by the paper that is reversed in the paper reversal and exit section M501 goes ON and conveyance roller A rotates causing the paper to be conveyed to the ADU Subsequently MC503 goes ON causing paper exit roller B to rotate and feed the paper to the ADU MC503 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS501 detects the leading edge of the paper and goes ON As a result the paper strikes the registration roller causing an appropriate paper loop to be formed 2 M 3 MC502 goes ON after the specified time from when
33. Copy count by paper size Collecting data 2 Total count and count during the specified period by paper size Management list Number of page Mana amp ement list 05 09 2000 10 6 4 55YF00005 TC 1981 ROM Ver A9 Machine name gt tine Nane 7046 Machine information gt chin information DESTINATION EU Date count data 10 08 2000 19 25 Total count Start date 25 07 2000 TOTAL COUNT 1981 Serial number 4 gt renter Nain body 55200006 Option tray 12800015 RADF 13LM00030 Finisher 13 00062 version ersien System control ag 802 Image control A2 Finisher ne 26 Optical control 16 RADF Copy count sean Count Scanner system RADF mode 61 49 Mixed original ADF mode 6 Mixed original RADF mode 8 Copy count Printer system RE Total copy count 900 Counter check Copy count of each paper size P Copy count of each paper size Item Setting PM COLNT CYCLE setting DRUM DEVELOPMENT COUNT 48 5 Overall control ROM version 1 68 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 2 Description Items F code count Collecting data 4 Total count and count during the specified periods JAM code count Collecting data 2 Total count and count during the specified period Management list Number of page Manageme
34. 44 5 To output the count value list press the Print key set to 1 y Note 2 Displayed when the check button on the P mode screen is pressed Counter list Note 3 Displayed when an option is installed Machine Nant 7015 Service center Fax 0426 6 9063 Machine information w Total count Start date 25 07 2000 COUNT 129 _ Seria number Main body 7 RADF 794400230 iFinisher TS POJ062 Print Court Total count mE 1299 Count Bo ee er p rs DRUM COUNT 1155 DEVELOPMENT COUNT 1155 6 Press the key or the stop clear button to return to the basic screen 25 ADJUSTMENT 25 MODE lt List of adjustment items for 25 mode gt Adjustment item menu Remarks 1 Software SW Refer to List of software SW 2 Paper size 3 PM COUNT CYCLE 1 PM COUNT reset 2 PM CYCLE set 4 Collecting data 1 Count data Collecting data 1 copy count by each size RADF paper passage count Collecting data 2 JAM occurrence count by each point Collecting data 3 copy count by each copy mode Collecting data 4 SC occurrence count F code Normally only collection data 1 can be selected In order to select collecting data 2 to 4 25 mode SW needs to be changed Date count data 2 5 Parts counter 1 Count of parts Fixed
35. CNT 388 B4 P GND C for HV2 389 24 24V 8 389 A4 24 CNT2 24V C 388 B7 P GND C for TONER MOTOR for PRINTER DRIVE BOAD 389 85 L2 CNT 388 A6 JP 5 for DRUM MOTOR 389 B4 CNT n GE CD jor MOTOR 388 A5 P eND C GE 9 7 389 82 HIRL1 CNT 388 1 P GND C 53 388 82 P GND C Ter DEV MOTOR 388 2 24V C 388 A3 24V C 388 5 P GND C 388 6 P GND C for FIRST FEED 33 2 EN CNT 2 389 A2 EN CNT P ED gm 7 2 EN_CNT 1 CP 911 1 it cat 383 1 5V 2152 1 1 5V 381 1 28v A 382 1 20V B 381 3 P GND A 3 PGND 2 d 208 22 SOND 4 5 1662 4 5 640 381 2 28V A lt gt FT22 FT23 381 4 P GND A em BY ED 7 4 12v RAE T acon DCPS2 oa 1 gt RLI CNT for OPTION DCPS 3 S GND ED 5 S GND SW1 MAIN SW 4 S GND BLK BLK Sez a ene d 5 12v e s 12v gt 39223 ACW gt RLI BLK 391 1 BLK 390 16 paso ES POT AS act BG MAIN d pa 250 0050 25 8 B id am 3852 5 GAS CBR 5 THERMOSTAT 190 25 vs BIS 4250 4 ngl
36. Press the YES key to start the periodic data collection Press the or RETURN key then data collection start date is not the collecting data screen reset and returns to No 2 Classification Main code Sub code 45 E56 6 Operation control section 46 E56 7 system abnormality 47 E56 8 48 E56 9 49 E56 10 50 F60 1 RADF abnormality 51 F67 1 52 F67 2 53 F67 3 54 F70 1 FNS abnormality 55 F77 1 56 F77 2 57 F77 3 58 F77 4 59 F77 5 60 F77 6 61 F77 7 62 F77 8 63 F77 9 64 F77 10 65 F77 21 66 F77 22 67 F77 30 68 F80 1 Non volatile memory 69 F80 2 abnormality 70 F80 3 71 F80 4 72 F80 5 73 F81 1 Flash ROM abnormality 74 F81 2 75 88 1 Image processing system abnormality 76 E89 1 Control board 77 89 2 communication 78 89 3 abnormality 79 E89 4 80 E89 5 81 E89 6 82 F56 11 Model identification abnormality 83 F87 Print controller abnormality 84 F52 Fan lock abnormality 85 86 87 25 ADJUSTMENT 6 Parts Counter Perform the copy count display count clear limit value setting and arbitrarily parts to be replaced setting to the data of the parts to be replaced fixed arbitrarily Each count value can be check with the management list of 36 Mode and the KRDS Parts counter menu 1 Copy Count for each fixed replacement part 2 Copy Count for each arbitrarily replacement part 1
37. SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC 24V DRIVE PGND H L CONT LOCK SIG The SCDB scanner drive board drives FM2 scanner cooling The PRDB printer drive board drives FM3 main body cooling FM4 conveyance suction and FM6 polygon cooling The DCPS1 DC power supply 1 drives FM5 DCPS cooling 1 Operation 24 V DC motor is used for each cooling fan a Operation of FM2 During idling Low speed rotation During a copy operation High speed rotation b Operation of FM3 During idling Low speed rotation During a copy operation High speed rotation Operation of FM4 FM4 goes ON in syncronism with M4 drum and it goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration going OFF d Operation of FM5 During idling Low speed rotation During a copy operation High speed rotation e Operation of FM6 When M5 polygon is ON fixed speed rotation 2 N 4 Signals Input signals FM2 LOCK FM2 to SCDB FM2 status detection signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotation abnormality LOCK SIG FM3 to PRDB status detection signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotation abnormality LOCK SIG FM4 to PRDB FM4 rotation error detect signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotation error FAN LOCK FM5 to DCPS1 FM5 status detection signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotation abnormality LOCK SIG FM6 to PRDB FM6 status detection signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotat
38. Zoom magnifications x0 25 to x4 00 1 steps Vertical magnifications x0 25 to x4 00 1 steps Horizontal magnifications Warm up time First copy out time x0 25 to x4 00 1 steps Within 90 seconds at 2012C at rated voltage 1 1 Warm up time differs de pending on the Power Source Voltage Approx 3 9 seconds When using face up paper exit manual mode platen mode and tray 1 are in use 1 A 2 Continuous copy count Size CPM 8 5x11 45 1 to 999 Copy density selections Resolution E RDH memory Application functions manual 9 steps AES Arbitrary density 2 modes 600 dpi x 600 dpi Standard 32 MB Maximum 288 MB Sheet Cover Insertion Chap ter Combination 2 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1 Booklet Special paper Image Insert Dual page Spe cial Original Text Photo En hance text photo Increase Reverse Image Repeat Frame Fold Erasure Auto Lay out Image Shift Non image Area Erase memory function density monitor single step copy density shift printing function copy reservation origi nal rotation weekly timer job memory KRDS 3 Applicable copy paper Plain paper Special paper by pass feed only 16 to 24 Ib high quality paper Label paper OHP film Blueprint master paper 13to 16 Ib high quality paper 24 to 35 Ib high quality paper 4 Options Finisher FS 109 Drawer base unit DB 208 500 x 3 trays DB 208A 500 x 1 tray
39. 20 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 21 When paper is fed from by pass tray Bypass paper feed 22 When paper is fed from tray 1 Tray 1 23 When paper is fed from tray 2 Tray 2 24 When paper is fed from tray 3 Tray 3 25 When paper is fed from tray 4 Tray 4 26 When paper is fed from ADU ADU 27 When paper is exited from main body Main body exit 28 When original is fed into RADF ADF 29 When original is fed into RADF ADF 30 When original is fed into RADF ADF 1 25 25 ADJUSTMENT 1 Count resetting method 2 Count limit setting method Enter the new limit value from the numeric keys on Step Operation procedure the screen 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Step Operation procedure Press the key 1 Enter the 25 mode 3 Parts counter set screen 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 2 Count of parts Named key Press the 5 Parts counter key 4 Count of parts Named screen 3 Parts counter menu screen Press the A Jor Y to select the data Press the 2 Count of parts Named key 5 Press the key 4 Count of parts Named screen 6 Count of parts Named screen Press the or v to select the data to be set When you press the YES the copy count is or changed cleared and the count of parts Named screen 5 Press the Limit set key re appears 6 Lim
40. 555 lt 9 ols s JH AE 5 pr _G _ 4 vla i4Hs 005 A0L v 0V o lt 18 13IHS 9 01 0 3 48 en 90 Q gS C325 1NOO 89 1700 59 ois A0l v Ov ED d 6a ze 1NO9 1H 2 e Br s X900 218 gt 3 HH 119 aS es 2E ul T 018 252 gt vu002 00 3AlH 69 55 oou amp lt 7 ot a 555 Ol 3 H IQ 9IS 9010 819 z CH lt 88 8 A8 Z 0V 1NO2 ri8 pm 48 17 00 82 z 595 Sd ti8 tt 55 8 26 35 lt o 2 5 5 H Ig9Is X90170 siv zv 1 00 1NOOH v8 95 0 4H ai 8 98 01 za 1995 28 7707 18 2 1NOd 1709 9 I E H IQg 9IS olv I ENE 6v 1 00 1NOOH 89 OND S 0 8 EE ve 139 994 62 26 13938 nJdB 1 00 AS yy 1 39 294 01 6 153135 Hl 0 00 EN 8 ONASA Bi 2 ols NIE m 9 ovs udld 1 00 s O3us udid 170 35 2 VLVOS Hdld 1 00 001 09 818 26 gt aD E 52 5 170 PD gt D G tog ind z D3IUW Yd 3 1 00 ar L 6 82 2 Ave AH 1700 4 29 28 Ave 901 1700 9
41. Caution Be sure to perform image quality adjustment after installing the CCD unit For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service Procedure Remove the two set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate Remove the two set screws then remove the read cover right Remove the three set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate rear Remove the original glass Original stopper plate rear Set screws Set screws with step with step Read cover right READ SEGTION Loosen the three set screws and remove the nine set screws then remove the lens light shield cover 5 Disconnect the two connectors 12 13 from the image control board 8 Set screws Loosen the set screws Set screws i Lens light shield cover Image control board Connector CN13 Connector CN12 Remove the side cover right Refer to External section Loosen the three lower set screws and remove the three upper set screws then remove the cover plate Loosen the three set screws Set screws Cover plate 3 C 2 9 Remove the two set screws and loosen ground plate fixed screw then remove the CCD unit CCD unit Ground plate fixed screw Set screws 10 Reinstall the CCD unit in the opposite sequence to removal 3 Replacing the Exposure Lamp L1 ACaut
42. DB 608 500 X 1 tray 1500 LCT Key counter Expansion memory unit MU 403 32MB DIMM MU 404 64MB DIMM MU 405 128MB DIMM Printer controller IP 431 Hard disk HD 103 Network board KN 303 PostScript PS 342 5 Particulars of machine Power supply 120 10 0 Power consumption Max 1500W Full option Weight Approx 229 Ibs Machine dimensions Width 25 5 in Depth 27 75 Height 29 3 in 6 Maintenance and Life Maintenance Every 100 000 copies 7 Consumables Developer Common with Konica 7033 7040 Toner Common with Konica 7040 Drum Common with Konica 7033 7040 60 8 Environmental conditions Temperature 50 to 86 C Humidity 10 to 80965 RH Note Specifications are subject to change without notice 7045 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS CENTER CROSS SECTIONAL VIEW CENTER CROSS SECTIONAL VIEW DF 315 standard CB control board Exposure lamp Charging corona section Slit glass Image read section PCL ICB image control board image read position Image write section Developing section Cleaning unit Fixing unit c EE 2nd paper feed section OX Ay 2009 __ Reversal Paper exit unit By pass tray Transfer corona section Q po ADU section Tray 1 Conveyanc
43. Don t care disable enable disable enable 2 5 Reserve Don t care Default value Hexadecimal 88 00 00 6 User data access setting 0 Prohibition local 1 Permission 7 Resarve 0 Note 1 For details of errors refer to 7 Error code table Note 2 3 9 Copy prohibition If SWs 39 5 and 40 0 are both set to 1 then it becomes impossible to copy KRDS 6 Setting host password This function sets the host password 1 Screen selection Select the 10 KRDS setting key in the 25 mode menu screen to display KRDS setting menu screen as an initial screen Then select the 2 Host password set key to display the host password setting screen 2 Setting method a Three patterns can be used to set KRDS host password The entry screen screen contents and setting method for each pattern are all the same Each message however is different There are only 2 patterns for a usable password Press the NEXT or BACK key to 2change the screen Enter the host password 5 digit number or alphabet with the numeric keys on the screen and press the key The firstly entered number or alphabet will be shifted to the left end After inputting the password it the NEXT BACK or RETURN key is pressed before pressing the key the data that has been entered is canceled Press the key and the
44. Input range 10 reduction to 10 enlargement Input range 20 reduction to 20 enlargement 1 step 0 1 96 1 step 0 1 96 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the horizontal 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification magnification becomes the standard value becomes the standard value 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the or BACK key to select the desired adjustment or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the key to return 12 Press the RETURNJkey to return to the timing to the timing adj screen Standard value 0 5 or less life size Within 1 0 mm with respect to 200 mm 8 Caution The result of the platen horizontal magnification will be reflected all the images read by scanner RADF platen adj screen Standard value 0 1 or less life size Within 2 mm with respect to 200 mm a Vertical magnification 200 Restart timing adjustment To adjust the restart timing Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the timing adjustment screen will appear Select the 2 Restart timing on this screen then the restart timing adjustment screen will appear This adjustment has the following kinds of items These can be selected by pressing the
45. SB Bit pattern LSB 4 3 Description Default value Hexadecimal 0 6 Select modem Dial mode No setting No data is sent to modem AT amp FEOQOV1X0S0 1 amp S0 AT amp FEOQOV1X0S0 1 amp S0 amp D2 amp C1 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp S0 E0 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp 50 amp D2 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 18 amp 50 amp M5 000 1 050 1 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 18 amp S0WN5 Data character length Parity and stop bit 0 0 o o o o o e 0 0 o o o o fo eo 0 Manual 3 to 24 byte data is sent to modem Pulse dial Tone dial 8 bit fixed No parity stop bit 1 fixed Even number of parity stop bit 1 Odd number of parity stop bit 1 No parity stop bit 2 Reserve Dont care 4 7 Baud rate 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps o o ol o o _ 0 Local echo Result code Result code form displayed result 4 5 Set DCD signal operation carrier detect Set DSR signal operation 0 0 o 19200 bps 38400 bps No setting Exist No setting Qo Exist N tti V1 Word No setting amp C1 ON only when the carrier is detected No setting
46. Set screws 2 Reinstall the rear cover in the opposite sequence to removal 3 Replacing the Fixing Filter a 1 2 Procedure Remove the rear cover Replacing the fixing filter Fixing filter 3 Reinstall the fixing filter in the opposite sequence to removal 3 A 2 4 Removing and Reinstalling the Side Cover right a Procedure 1 Pull out the ADU and tray1 and open the front door 2 Open the by pass tray 3 Loosenthe four set screws then remove the side cover right By pass tray Side cover right Set screws 4 Reinstall the side cover right in the opposite sequence to removal DRIVE SECTION DRIVE SECTION Disassembly and Reassembly Caution Disassembly and reassembly of the drive section is not made in the normal service 1 READ SECTION 1 Screws That Must Not Be Removed a The 16 set screws of the CCD unit Screws that must not be removed on the CCD Screws that must CCD sensor board side not be removed Screw that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed Screws that must not be removed Screws that Screws that must must not be not be removed emoved 3 C 1 READ SEGTION 2 Removing and Reinstalling the CCD Unit N Caution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet
47. 0 7 14 0 7 Arbitrary command regist 15 0 7 ration area 4 16 0 7 Command free setting 17 0 Set register bit 0 7 0 No setting 01 50 Automatic receive ring count J 1 S0 Effectivedata 1 S6 Waittime trom offhook of to dial start 1 S6 Effective data 2 87 hook limit imer _ Jof Nosetting 1 S7 Effective data 3 6 KRDS No MSB Bit pattern LSB Default value Function Description byte bit 71654 312 0 Hexadecimal 17 3 88 Dial stop time sec 01 1 S8 Effective data 4 89 Carrier recognize time 1 S9 Effective data 5 810 Allowable carrier stop time 1 10 Effective data 6 511 1 S11 Effective data 7 Reserve Pont 18 S0 data No of times data 00 FFH 01H 1 01 was received automatically 19 S6 data Wait time until 00 FFH 03H 3 03 dialing starts 20 S7 data Wait time until 00 FFH 1 30 1 carrier detect 21 58 data Pause time 00 FFH 03H 3 03 22 59 data Carrier detection 00 FFH O6H 6 06 time 23 510 data Carrier dis 00 FFH OEH 14 OE connection detection time 24 S11 data 00 FFH 5FH 95 5F 25 Timer 1 Ring reception gt 00 FFH 20H 32 x 15 20 Connect reception 26 Timer 2 Dial call end 00 FFH 40H 64 x 1sec 40 Connect reception 27 Timer 3 00 FFH OAH
48. 1 89 CONTENTS 4 Paper Skew Adjustment 1 90 5 RADF Skew Adjsutment DF 315 1 91 6 RADF Paper Skew Adjustment DF 315 1 92 7 Tray 2 3 Belt Tension Adjustmentt FS 109 1 93 2 ISW a ETG 2 1 1 Boards that Support ISW 2 2 2 Operating Method 2 2 3 KRDS KRDS 3 1 1 Specifications 3 1 2 KRDS Setting 3 1 3 KRDS Set up 3 2 4 Calling Time Set Menu Mode Arbitrary 3 13 5 Point to Notice for Operation 3 16 6 ASCII Code Table 3 17 7 Error Code 3 18 4 SERVICE SERVICE SCHEDULE 4 1 1 Service Schedule 4 1 2 Maintenance Items 4 2 3 Main Body Periodic Check 4 6 4 RADF DF 315 esses 4 7 5 DB DB 208 4 7 6 DB DB 608 4 7 7 FNS FS 109 4 7 8 Actual Count Replacement Parts 4 8 COPY MATERIALS 4 10 PM
49. 2 D 2 2 Signals a Input signals 1 POLY PULL LOCK PMDB to SCDB M5 rotation speed monitoring signal L Normal rotation H Stop or rotation abnormality M5 MAG A A M5 to PMDB M5 MAG B B M5 to PMDB M5 MAG C C M5 to PMDB These are output signals from the position sensors magnetic sensors installed inside M5 The PMDB detects the position of the rotor of the motor by means of these signals and switches over the M5 DRIVE A to C output b Output signals 1 POLY CONT SCDB to PMDB This signal controls the ON OFF state of M5 L M5 ON H M5 OFF POLY CLK SCDB to PMDB This is a reference clock signal for PLL controlling M5 in the PMDB M5 DRIVE A to C PMDB to M5 This is the drive output signal for M5 While M5 is rotating voltages are output sequentially from M5 DRIVE A to C and applied to M5 The voltage from each output that is applied to M5 consists of the pulses shown below The pulse width of this output changes according to the rotation condition of M5 as shown in the figure and as a result the RMS value of the voltage applied to M5 changes causing the speed to be regulated M5 DRIVE M5 DRIVE B M5 DRIVE C MWM TM TMU WRITE UNIT 4 Image Write Control 5VDC SGND ISIH ENB VIDEO ALM N C DACLK D LD 5VDC SGND INX SGND IDPR 5VDC INDEXSB The analog image data from the
50. 55GA7502 4 Bearing 55GA7503 Q b Fixing bearing lower 55GA7504 Q 3 Periodic check III Every 800 000 copies or prints Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Material used ing Pnek cation ment Tools used 1 Fixing unit 1 Fixing heater lamp 1 55HF8302 2 Fixing heater lamp2 55 8303 Q 4 6 SERVICE 4 RADF DF 315 1 Periodic check Every 200 000 copies or prints Implementation classification cens No Classification Service item Clean Check Lubri Replace Supply nn ing cation ment 1 Paper feed 1 Paper feed roller 120A4582 section 2 Separation roller 120A4582 3 Double feed prevention 120A 458 4 Paper dust removing pad 129H 472 5 DB DB 208 1 Periodic check Every 300 000 copies or prints Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Supply 22 ing cation ment 1 Paper feed 1 Separation roller 54004056 section 2 Paper feed roller 25BA4032 three units 3 Double feed prevention roller 54004056 6 DB DB 608 1 Periodic check Every 200 000 copies or prints Implementation classification Classifica
51. Basic Functions deis Auto trouble notification bes a Dataonthecopier s status such as total and PM count Operation count auto acquisition b Data on the frequency of the partial copier such as Remote control machine adjustment data RADF paper feed count rewriting of the counter limit etc c Data on the copier s error status such as SC F Notification of frequent JAM occurrence occurrence code and count Replenish toner notification Data on the various adjustments Repair and other call buttons To use KRDS set up as follows Initialize KRDS memory Set the type of modem and line Enter host password Bop Set phone number KRDS setting menu Calling time set Host password set KRDS TEL No setting KRDS software SW set KRDS setup calling gr dee qos 3 1 KRDS 3 KRDS Set Up 1 Host password must be 5 digit 2 Host password 1 must be specified 1 KRDS set up item A P 8 For both the copier and the host side copier phone KRDS set up procedure number and host phone number 1 must be Step Operation procedure specified 1 Turn off the modem and connect to the copier 4 Refer to the manual of the modem about using a modem cable RS 232C 25P 25P specifications for connecting with the modular straight cable and wall jack using a modular cable cable to the modem 2 Setting the KRDS connection recognition 25 mode to 1 Software SW Set copier software DI
52. Claw Torque limiter Plunger By pass SD 6 Reinstall the by pass paper feed rubber in the opposite sequence to removal 4 Replacing the By pass Separation Rubber a Procedure 1 Remove the by pass paper feed unit 2 Remove the two stop rings 3 Pulloutthe by pass conveyance shaft then remove the by pass separation roller Remove the by pass separation rubber from the by pass separation roller By pass separation rubber By pass conveyance shaft Paint mark Stop ring By pass Separation roller Stop ring Reinstall the by pass separation rubber in the opposite sequence to removal Caution Check that the mounting orientation of the by pass separation rubber is correct 3 J 3 PAPER FEED UNIT 5 Replacing the By pass Double Feed Prevention Rubber a Procedure 1 Remove the by pass paper feed unit 2 Remove the double feed pressure spring from the double feed prevention unit then open the double feed prevention unit While pressing the lever section of the lever click shaft then pull out the lever click shaft 4 Remove the by pass double feed prevention roller Remove the by pass double feed prevention rubber from the by pass double feed prevention roller k 3 o Lever section Lever click shaft By pass double feed prevention rubber By pass double feed prevention roller Double feed pressure spring Paint mark
53. Connector 21 Set screws CN20 Connector CN23 Set screw 3 C 8 Remove the three set screws and the belt tension spring then remove the scanner motor M2 and timing belt 7 Belt tension spring Timing belt Scanner moter 8 Loosen the set screw holding the spring retainer rear slide it to the paper exit side while pressing it with a flat blade screwdriver etc to fix it again with the set screw Set screw Spring retainer rear READ SEGTION 9 Slide the spring retainer front to the paper exit side to fix it in the same way Set screw Spring retainer front 10 Remove the two set screws then remove the read driven pulley 11 Remove the C ring and bearing on the rear side of the machine Be careful not to scratch the pulley shaft y Bearing PE P 27 Pulley shaft Rear side of Set screws the machine Read driven pulley 3 9 12 Remove the one C ring and bearing on the front side of the machine from the pulley shaft in the same way Pulley shaft Front side of the machine Bearing 13 Remove the two optics wires front and rear 14 Remove the pulley shaft from the main body At this time if the leading edge of the set screw holding the optics rail contacts with the shaft loosen the set screw READ SEGTION 6 Ins
54. Ev El v OA DNAS HS I V 0l INDEX SB LDB SI 7 El TONER COTROL SENSOR BOARD Appendix 3 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 3 7 to BIAS MAIN MOTOR DRUM MOTOR HL 01 AS HL 6 0 Viu002 00 1NO2 7048 Ave T 8 c 42 4 S 1580 H710 z gt xo 1858 9 ET 4 5 07 b Gre d 2 5 5 90 552 non amp 178 og szg 915 H 1Q 028 20 2 678 1HOdNI ano s GT 0997091994 oga ze 95 H3NO 2997 5599 2897 5540 HAAN sam PET knr 4 618 ZONV ZHlB 5 zi 6E 997 818 19NV AS 0 1V a 25 lt Gen 4 ZONV IHLE vZV 525 Dar TEXT gla ee 19NV IHLE AS 0 19 V APZE 2V 2E 559 5 EC anos zzv EE gt D 159 Id 9 13A37 HINO 12 2997 gt 2997 Ep g AS H3NOL oye DET T Cu 2589 H IQ 9IS 61v E gt fm 1 00 1NOOH 81 2 25
55. M H RF plate rear m Set screws Step Operation procedure 1 Pull out the LCT tray 2 Loosen the screw on the RF plate front and two screws on the RF plate rear 3 Push the adjusting plate in and loosen the set screw With the adjusting plate pressed down move the centering adjustment screw with the standard screwdriver retighten the screws then adjust the paper centering 5 After adjustment is complete be sure to tighten the screw on the RF plate front and two screws on the RF plate rear 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the extent of paper centering falls within the specified range Specified range Extent of paper centering Within 2 mm Center of image Center of paper 2 Adjusting the Inclination of the Paper Tray DB 608 If the paper tray is inclined it may not feed paper correctly Adjust the inclination of the paper tray so that the tray is parallel to the paper feed roller shaft When replacint the up down wires always carry out this adjustment 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips head Metal scale 2 Adjustment method Step Operation procedure 1 Remove the front tray cover 2 Loosen the wire adjusting piece set screw on the front part of the tray Wire adjusting piece Set screw 3 Adjust the position of the wire adjustment piece so that the di
56. Remove the two set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate Remove the three set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate rear Remove the original glass Remove the two set screws then remove the read cover left Remove the read cover front Original stopper plate rear Set screws with step Set screws Read cover left Set screws with step Read cover front Original glass 6 Remove the two set screws then remove the two glass holders and original glass 1 7 Remove the two set screws then remove the glass stopper plate Set screws Set screws Glass holders Original glass 1 Glass stopper plate READ SEGTION 8 Remove the ten set screws then remove the rear cover Refer to External section 9 Remove the RADF Refer to the service handbook of the DF 315 10 Remove the three set screws disconnect the relay connector CN91 then remove the read cover rear Set screws Read cover rear Y Relay connector CN91 11 Movethe exposure unitto the position ofthe notch in the main body frame at the rear 12 Remove the four set screws each then remove the two exposure unit mounting pieces front and rear from the exposure unit Set screws Set screws Exposure unit mounting piece rear Exposure unit mounting piece front
57. and BACK keys you can select the following item from this screen RADF face side RADF back side Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 86 mode menu screen Press the 9 RADF adj key 3 RADF adj screen Press the 3 Paper Loop adj key 4 Paper loop adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired item appears in the message display area 5 Press the COPY key 6 Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on RADF then select an A3 or 11 x 17 copy paper Then press the start button to make copy Check paper feed loop volume of the output Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the paper loop adj screen Paper loop adj screen If the paper feed loop amount is inappropriate enter a desired value from the numeric keys then press the SET key to validate it Input range 10 decrease through 00 standard up to 10 increase 1 step 0 5 mm 10 Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until an appropriate paper feed loop volume is obtained 11 You can proceed to adjustment of another item from the NEXT and BACK keys 12 Press the RETURN key to return to the RADF adj screen 1 66 Centering adjustment Centering adjustment on RADF in feed direction is done in the following procedures Select the 8 RADF adj from the 36 Mode Menu Screen to display the Timing Adjustment Screen Select the 4 Centring adj from this screen
58. complete without changing new parts No and returns to the count of parts Named screen 1 27 4 Parts name setting Enter the new parts name from the keys on the screen There are three screen in the input screen and are changed with the W or a key Alphabet a capital letter numeric number Alphabet a small letter numeric number Symbol numeric number Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 5 Parts counter key 3 Parts counter set screen Press the 2 Count of parts Named key 4 Count of parts Named screen Press the A Jor v to select the data to be set or changed 5 Press the Parts name key 6 Name Input screen Enter new parts name using the keys on the screen 7 Press the key to finalize the entered part name When you press this key the copy count screen for the designated replacement part re appears 8 Press the CANCEL key to return to the count of parts Named screen Caution If you press the key without pressing the key the set date remains unchanged and the 25 mode menu screen re appears 25 ADJUSTMENT 7 Password Setting This function sets the password to enter each mode In the 25 mode menu screen select the 6 Password setting then the password setting menu screen will appear Select the password to be adjusted entered i
59. print operation the machine proceeds to the next job without stopping after the end of the ongoing print job When this setting is 0 the print operation stops after the end of the ongoing printjob However if any of conditions 1 to 7 below exists the print operation stops after the end of the ongoing print job even if this setting is 1 Conditions under which print operation stops 1 The ongoing print job current job and the next reserved job are of different kinds reserved copy fax printer interrupt copy The printer modes are different The current job is a two sided mode job and the next reserved job is a one sided mode job There is no FNS and the output mode of the current job non sort sort group differs from the output mode of the next job When an FNS is installed the output mode stapling position at front rear and both and paper exit tray tray 1 to tray 4 of the current job and the next reserved job are different The application functions booklet intersheet memory copy page insertion rotation sort of the next reserved job are selected The special original settings mixed original Z fold non standard of the current job and the reserved job are different Currernt job is confirmation copy 25 ADJUSTMENT Also occasionally paper feed is continuous Conditions 1 Normal copy mode is used One side copy mode is used Staple s posit
60. setting method for each pattern are all the same Each screen however is different Press the NEXT or BACK key to change the screen Enter the telephone number 15 digit or less number with the numeric keys on the screen and press the key The entered number is displayed in the cursor section displayed in the line 2 of the message display area The cursor shifts from left to right according to the entered If more than 15 digit is entered the number of the 15 digit is rewritten To reenter the telephone number press the Stop clear button to clear the data then enter the correct number If you wish to change the number of an arbitrary position press the or key to move the cursor to the desired position and reenter No data has been set for the second row of the message area prior to shipping 3 11 h The keys except the numeric keys are defined as follows Pause Wait temporarily for self dial feed 2 3 sec W Wait Wait for dial tone such as asynchronous etc excluding sound guidance Tone Dial Indicate tone dial after this symbol Pulse Dial Indicate pulse dial after this symbol Symbol to divide numbers This symbol is ignored when dialing 8 3 Use these keys as required such extension number After inputting the password it the NEXT BACK or RETURN key is pressed before pressing the key the data that has been entered is canceled
61. the main body is stopped after exit of the paper Open the RADF and remove the jammed paper and close it JAM ERROR CODES Classify Causes Jam clearing method cation code 5 FNS 472 1 5802 drum is ON during FNS and main body are Remove the jammed 5 idling stoped immediately paper of the FNS and J72 4 PS803 tray 1 paper exit detect is main body during idling J72 10 PS803 tray 1 paper exit detect is not turned ON within a certain period after PS1 paper exit has been turned ON J72 11 PS803 tray 1 paper exit detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J72 12 PS802 drum entrance is not turned ON within a certain period after PS1 paper exit has been turned ON d J72 13 PS802 drum entrance is not turned Z OFF within certain period after it has been turned ON J72 14 5804 paper through detect is not 8 turned ON within certain period after 5802 drum entrance has been turned ON J72 15 5804 paper through detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J72 16 Paper detect sensor of the stapler unit is not turned ON within certain period after M805 paper exit has been turned ON J72 21 Stapler front staple jam J72 22 Stapler rear staple jam Paper feed J80 PS17
62. without performing paper detection or jam detection Running mode 5 Running mode 5 is process running mode It consists of running mode 4 plus an operation consisting of an optics each time scan and an automatic paper feed tray change Cartridge set mode Use this mode if black spots appear on the copy after you replace the drum unit 1 48 a When one of mode keys 1 to 5 is selected Step Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 3 Running mode key Running mode screen Press the key according to the desired running mode Mode 1 to Mode 5 Basic screen Press the start print button After checking the copy operation press the stop clear button to stop copy operation Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the running mode screen To perform another running test mode repeat steps 3 to 6 Press the RETURN key to return to 36 mode menu screen b When mode key 6 is selected Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 3 Running mode key mode screen Running Press the 6 Cartridge set mode key Cartridge set screen START Press the The developing unit and the drum rotate for 4 minutes Note then 10 copies are automatically made and the cartridge installation mode screen re appears Repeat steps 4
63. 1 0 Copy quantity level 3 1 1 Copy quantity level 4 2 3 Call ADF JAM date 0 0 Original feed quantity level 1 Valid original feed quantity TT 1 Original feed quantity level 2 110 Original feed quantity level 3 111 Original feed quantity level 4 4 5 Call JAM date 01 0 level 1 setting 110 level 3 111 level 4 6 7 Call JAM date 010 MOB level 1 MOBI setting MOB level 2 110 MOB level 111 level 4 35 Reserve 36 Reserve 37 Reserve Default value Hexadecimal 99 00 OA 55 OA 00 00 KRDS No byte bit unction 38 0 Line type automatic recognition 1 MSAD connection 2 KRDS communication mode MSB Bit pattern LSB 7165432100 0 1 Description off on connect DATA Using modem FAX 3 5 Reserve 6 PM limit data length Don t care Upper 2 digit fixed for host All 6 digit for host 7 Regular transmit communication Sequence control 39 0 1 Reserve 2 RS 232 line error K01 XX Note 1 3 Modem AT command error K02 XX Note 1 E Don t care Call back communication No call back communication copy enable copy disable copy enable copy disable Reserve 5 Force copy stop at host side Note 2 Dont care disable enable 6 7 Reserve 40 0 Force copy stop Note 2 at terminal equipment side 1 Jam history data clear
64. 10 100Base T X KN 303 Eier to Board Connector 124pin PS1 CN3 Board I flow Direction of signal 2 e indicates the direction of signal flow The solid black circle e among Example the connector symbols 4 Signal flow Flash Compact Faston ith 5 5 o Ke gt eo n to Board Connector 124pin IONS WI GND GND 18 GND 217 GND 18 2 19 20 CF AD 21 GND GND GND a 7 8 224 F XIOIS16 gt 8 02 5 449 9 GND 10 GND 22 cr 223 cr D2 249 CF bio 50 GND o 55 NN 50 1 Connector T 589888 38 244 Sz 3i CN4 Board itch turned ON 2 Wiring symbols in the figure are as follows Analog signal P Pulse signal 9 9 lt 2 5 lt E 1 The signals shown reflect levels present under normal idling cond m o E E o gt 9 5 I i sucus QNO 978 El 45 22539 82 5 2 AS 3828 Osean
65. 2 Mechanisms 2 D 1 3 5 Polygon Control 2 D 2 4 Image Write Control 2 D 3 DRUM UNIT Ae 2 1 1 2 1 2 Mechanisms 2 E 1 3 PCL TSL Control 2 E 2 4 Separation Claw Control 2 E 2 5 Transfer Entrance Guide Plate Control 2 E 3 CORONA UNIT SECTION 2 F 1 1 2 F 1 2 Mechanisms 2 F 1 3 Charging Control 2 F 2 4 Transfer Separation Control 2 F 3 DEVELOPING UNIT sese 2 G 1 1 Composition 2 G 1 2 Mechanisms 2 G 1 3 Developing Control 2 G 2 CONTENTS 4 Developing Bias 2 G 3 5 Toner Density Control 2 G 4 6 Dmax 2 G 6 7 Gradation Correction Control 2 G 7 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 2 H 1 Composition 2 1 2 Mechanisms
66. 5 759 gt 2897 9v anya 02 00 gE eg UEZEE A a Tes Sz8 gt 391 g 298 828 lt 95 UA 28 AG 28 26 a 45 S vuoz 00 55 98 Cr ev 383 918 sd va ED a Er 55 2 vwo0z 700 85 IN LAZ zo S ezg 10 9IS visd 228 619 2 ELV AS 128 018 H 10 9IS 6158 0208 26 68 LAPZ 00 5 88 ONSA 5 18 gt 28 98 1 19 lt 58 TH OW 00 va 715012 00 8 JANG 1700 28 za OND S 052 vas 8v 0sl p lt CET gt 2D 1 E 18 081 S v 9 09 p gt C 8 4 zy g 8 5 Q or E a 9N 91v L5 9N 81 23 vlv tlv AS ZIN ZE vw091 00 3AIHQ LIN B 752 gt 4 5 Ave 8 GID aema 1 98 139 294 S 9IS WAH QN5 s H IQ OIS LISA 1 10 915 9154 Szv ZLNOA zv INIA vW08 00 3NHA 154 ED 72955 2 gt 1397 zi Ave 764 9 1 b e 725 Ty gt 27 0S4MOT C Mets 5 lev 1S4 MOT 5 2 Ave gt 61 GSH vw0r 00 lt 81v WA 1021 70 vw09L 00 3AlHd C d 2 a Ave Olt 3 7 gt Pis 9375 a710 95 Eg 9iv 2125 01 69 slv 81715
67. ADU feed MC MC503 1 B 5 Paper Exit Drive 6 Reversa DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 7 Read Unit Drive 26 2 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 8 Toner Supply Drive Toner supply motor 1 M10 Toner cartridge drive coupling Agitator plate Ll LLL yr 77 Toner supply motor 2 M11 Toner conveyance screw 1 B 8 UNIT EXPLANATION EXTERNAL SECTION 1 Composition EXTERNAL SEGTION Sub power swicth Operation panel Main power switch TL Front door 3 lt gt Vo Left side cover Paper exit cover RADF Rear cover By pass tray Paper feed door 2 A 1 DRIVE SECTION DRIVE SECTION 1 Composition Scanner motor Drum motor Developing motor Reversal paper exit motor 1st paper feed motor Main motor 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Drum drive 1 Gear drive Developing drive 1 Gear drive 1st paper feed drive Timing belt gear drive 2nd paper feed convey Gear drive ance and fixing drive ADU drive Timing belt gear drive Reversal paper exit drive Timing belt gear drive 1 Separation of the different parts of the drive system The drum and developing agitator of this machine are
68. CCD sensor is A D converted and processed by the ADB A D converter board The processed image data is memorized by the CB control board then returned to the ICB image control board once again and converted into laser record signal The laser record signal is transmitted via the CB to the LDB Laser drive board by the control signal from the ICB and output as an optical signal from the laser installed on the LDB The write start position of the laser record signal is detected by INDEXSB index sensor board 1 Operation Image processing The following processing is carried out by the ICB Automatic Offset Correction IC on ADB automatically adjusts analog off set voltage of CCD sensor output Automatic Gain Correction When SW2 sub power is turned ON the white reference plate is read and the amplification of the analog output from the CCD sensor is automatically adjusted so that the resulting level is the upper limit of the A D converter 2 D 3 RR 1 Shading correction Implementation timing White correction Black correction When SW2 is ON Before job Brightness density conversion AES processing Text dot pattern judgement Filtering Magnification change processing Copy correction Write density control Write The ICB sends image data one pixel at a time to LDB in accordance with control signals from the CB LDB cause the laser to emit at a ti
69. DF mode is on the paper exit side of PS3 optics HP While the exposure unit is moving from the standby position platen APS read position to the DF read position the shading correction read operation takes place Upon reaching the DF read position the exposure unit remains there until the original has been read upon completion of reading then once again moves to the platen APS read position and goes into standby status DF original Shading correction read position read position 1 1 1 I Platen APS read position Reference point Scanning operation during platen copy mode In the platen mode the motion of the exposure unit differs depending upon whether the copy density mode is set to AE or Manual In both cases a shading correction read operation takes place before the exposure scanning operation starts After completion of the exposure scanning then the exposure unit moves to the APS read position and goes into a standby status 1 AE mode Shading correction read position PS3 AE scan Exposure scan Platen APS read 1 position Reference point 2 C 3 READ SECTION 2 When manual density has been selected Shading correction read position PS3 Exposure scan Reference point Platen APS read position 3 Booklet mode Output 1 to N AE mode Shading correction read position PS3 Y Exposure scan rear half Exposure s
70. Enter the 36 mode 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj key Press the 2 Timing adj key 3 Timing adj screen 3 Timing adj screen Press the 1 Drum clock adj key Press the 1 Drum clock adj key 4 Drum clock adj screen 4 Drum clock adj screen Press the NEXT key until Drum clock adj Printer Press the NEXT key until Drum clock adj appears in the message display area platen appears in the message display area 5 Press COPY key 5 Press the COPY key 6 Basic screen 6 Basic screen Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the Set the new pyramid chart on the original glass start button to print SGU pattern and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper Then press 7 Measure the vertical magnification of the output paper the start button to make copy Standard value 0 5 or less life size 7 Measure the vertical magnification of the output paper Within 1 mm with respect to 205 7 mm Standard value 0 5 or less life size 8 Press the C button while pressing the P button to Within 1 mm with respect to 200 mm return to the Drum clock adj screen 8 Press the C button while pressing the P button to 9 Drum clock adj screen return to the Drum clock adj screen If the vertical magnification is different from the 9 Drum clock adj screen standard value enter a value from the numeric If the vertical magnification
71. GR B 9 FNS MTXD O 30 282 10 S GND do gt Tait FS 109 P sm sv e 15 910089 175 13 sv COREE 15 1202 gt gt 188 gt m 20 1 28V A CHE s for 0 5 1 2 P GND A GBB 2910085 18 3 24v B Lo 1587 24v B mE PRE TET BLU mu m 6 P GNS B 54 P GND 8 5 N C SHIELD 6 N C RED ED 59 3 82 5 22 14 CNT GE Ce EE fA lt lt lt MOTOR o o SE SA ED tt qe MAIN FEED MOTOR NR DEV MOTOR for TONER SUPPLY 9 INTERLOCK IN 4DARB301 2 for PRINTER DRIVE PRINTER DIVE BOARD 380 1 28 1882 380 4 P GND A 288 386 1 24 1867 386 2 24v B 1067 386 5 P GND B 2857 386 6 P GND B 1887 381 6 24V C 381 5 380 2 28 CD foe BLO HEATER 3805 P GND A 0 FE 38 9 auto 18 G0 63 GRE 9 386 7 P GND C 387 1 24V C 387 2 24V 387 24V C for FS 105 1 DRIVE 387 1 P GND C E 387 82 P GND C DCPS FANI 2 LOCK COOLING ANT ENG 387 83 P GND C FAN 380 3 28V A 380 6 P GND A 387 B4 24V C 387 5 24V C DCPS1 387 5 P GND C 387 A6 P GND C for DB UNIT 386 8 P cND C gt ED 7 386 4 24V C gt 9 e for SCANER FAN 388 83 P GND C for HVI AS BEAN
72. ICB to CB to LDB Storage directive signal for MPC setting value S H ICB to CB to LDB APC sampling signal for one line scan ENB ICB to CB to LDB Laser APC function ON OFF control signal While this signal is OFF then the laser beam output is prohibited 2 D 4 DRUM UNIT DRUM UNIT 1 Composition Charging corona unit Separation claws Charge cleaning knob Developing unit PCL Charging corona unit Drum Cleaning unit T Developing unit Cleaning unit gee Transfer separation Drum corona unit 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Carriage support Fixed rail PCL LED Auxiliary separation Separation claws The drum unit of this machine is an integral assembly consisting of the drum and also the charging corona unit developing unit cleaning unit toner recycle unit and the PCL which are installed around the drum 2 E 1 DRUM UNIT 3 PCL TSL Control 4 Separation Claw Control 24VDC PCL CONT 24VDC TSL DRIVE 24VDC MC1 DRIVE SGND 516 SIG 5VDC 24VDC SD1 DRIVE 24VDC MC1 DRIVE The PCL pre charging lamp and TSL transfer synchronization lamp consist of LEDs which are controlled by the PRDB printer drive board 1 Operation PCL goes ON after the specified time from when the Start print button is pressed and goes OFF again after the specified time from the turning OFF of PS16
73. L1 ON H L1 OFF 2 4 5 Original Read Control The original is read by the CCD sensor installed on the ADB A D converter board Operation The light from the exposure lamp reflects back from the original passes through a lens and hits the CCD sensor The CCD sensor generates an anolog electrical signal corresponding to the light intensity The ADB then converts this signal into a digital signal Original read operation The original read timing is as follows During a platen copy operation PS3 optics HP goes OFF after the specified time from when the Start button is pressed and then the exposure unit moves 2 mm to the paper feed side During a DF copy operation After the specified time from the ON of PS308 original feed detect by original leading edge 2 C 5 READ SECTION 6 APS Control SGND OPT HOME 5VDC 5VDC APS TIMING SGND SGND APS DATA2 5VDC SGND APS DATA3 5VDC SCDB APS takes place as a result of the signals read by the APS sensors and CCD sensor being sent to the ICB image control board when the RADF is opened and closed Related signals are PS3 PS4 APS timing and PS301 DF open close detect Operation APS detection operation The APS detection operation differs depending upon whether the platen mode or DF mode is used During a DF copy operation An original size is detected by ON or OFF of PS302 original size det
74. No paper detect PS DCPS cooling fan FM4 Conveyance suction fan M8 PFDB PRDB Tray motor Paper feed detect board Printer drive board PS32 Upper limit detect PS SW2 PRMB OB INV Sub power switch Parameter memory board Inverter L1 Exposure lamp L1 INVB L1 Inverter board LCD Display board OB Operation board DCPS2 DC power supply unit 2 PMDB Polygon motor drive board PS3 DEAS Optics HP PS Index sensor board ICB Image control board ADB A D converter board PS26 APS sensor 2 PS25 APS sensor 1 M5 Polygon motor LDB Laser drive board CB PS4 Control board APS timing PS 5 1 DIAGRAMS TIMIING CHARTS FM6 Polygon cooling fan FM2 Scanner cooling fan 2 SW1 Main power switch C T Total counter MS2 Inter lock MS2 MS1 Inter lock MS1 28 Reversal detection PS 1 PTC heater PS30 Reversal detection PS 2 M10 Toner level detection sensor PCL Pre charging lamp 11 Toner supply motor 2 TCSB Toner control sensor board SD1 TDS Toner density detection sensor 5 2 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS HUM1 Humidity sensor ES B ve Registration PS PS17 No feed PS TSL MC1 Transfer synchronization lamp Registration MC MC501 ADU restart MC PS501 ADU no feed PS TH1 Fixing temperature sensor 1 TS PS29 Thermostat Fixing exit PS TH2 ADU registration P
75. PE cleaning block 1 D Cleaner mount assembly Am JE Spring 8 Reinstallthe charging wire cleaning block C and D in the opposite sequence to removal 3 F 5 DEVELOPING UNIT DEVELOPING UNIT 1 Screws That Must Not Be Removed Caution Never do any adjustments remove set screws or any similar task at the market in regards to the items below 1 The two set screws of the developing regulating plate 2 The one set screw of the magnet angle adjustment plate Screw that must not be removed Screw that must not be removed Screw that must not be removed 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Developing Unit a Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section 2 the recycle pipe a few times around the discharge opening to drop recycled toner into the developing unit Tap this part few times 3 Disconnect the relay connector 65 4 Loosenthetwo set screws then the developing unit from the drum unit Set screw Set screw Relay connector 65 3 G 1 DEVELOPING UNIT 5 Place paper under the toner exit of the toner recycle 3 Replacing the Developer pipe for catching remaining toner Caution 1 When replacing the developer take care that dirt does not become mixed with it Caution 2 After supplying new de
76. PS28 goes OFF As a result conveyance roller C is driven so as to assist in the formation of an appropriate loop MC502 goes OFF while MC503 goes OFF Re start control MC501 goes ON after the specified time from when PS501 goes ON causing the paper to be re started and conveyed to the 2nd paper feed section MC501 goes OFF after the specified time from when it goes ON M501 ON OFF timing ON timing When PS28 goes OFF OFF timing When MC501 goes OFF when the last sheet of paper re starts ADU SECTION Signals Input signals LOOP PS PS501 to PRDB Jammed paper detection signal at entrance of ADU conveyance section This signal becomes L when paper is detected ADU SET SIG PS502 to PRDB Jammed paper detection signal at inside of ADU conveyance section This signal becomes L when paper is detected PS SIG PS28 to PRDB Paper passage detection signal at the reversal roller section This signal becomes L when paper is detected M501 LOCK M501 to PRDB M501 ADU paper feed rotational status detection signal This signal becomes L when M501 reaches the set speed 2 M 4 Output signals MC501 DRIVE PRDB to MC501 MC501 ADU restart ON OFF drive signal MC501 ON H MC501 OFF MC502 DRIVE PRDB to MC502 MC502 ADU loop ON OFF drive signal MC502 ON H MC502 OFF MC503 DRIVE PRDB to MC503 MC503 ADU feed ON OFF drive signal L MC503 ON H MC503 OFF M501 H L PR
77. Press the 6 Image quality adj key Image quality adjustment screen Press the 1 PMW gamma Patch key PWM gamme Patch screen Press the NEXT Jor BACK key until PWM gamma Patch Dmax will appear in the message display area Press the START p confirm that the is displayed in RESULT indication area Note3 Preform b SGU pattern print next NEXT Jor BACK key until PWM gamma Patch SGU will appear in the message display area Press the To end the adjustment press the RETURN key Note3 Preform next adjustment after displaying the OK in result display area 1 57 b Output SGU pattern print test patterns No 50 and No 51 Step Operation procedure 1 After a Dmax correction last adjustment item is completed correctly then press the NEXT or BACK key until PWM gamma Patch SGU will appear in the message display area SGU test pattern print screen No 50 key Press the Press the COPY 1 Basic Screen Select A3 or 11x17 size paper then press the Start print button Note2 Test pattern No 50 is outputted Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the SGU test pattern print screen Repeat steps 2 to 4 to output the Test pattern No 51 In step 2 press the key Preform gamma correction ne
78. SERVICE 3 Main Body Periodic Check 1 Periodic check I Every 200 000 copies or prints Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Material used Check Supply Tools used ing cation ment 1 Fixing unit 1 Fixing claw upper 25SA5315 2 Heat insulating sleeve 45405339 Tri flow 3 Fixing roller upper 55GA5303 2 Drum unit 1 Drum Setting powder 2 Separation claw 55GA 206 3 Drum counter reset 47 mode 3 Developing 1 Developer include the developing unit unit installing 2 L detection adjustment 36 mode o 4 Paper feed 1 Separation roller 54004056 Q unit 2 Paper feed roller 25BA4032 Q 3 Double feed prevention roller 54004056 5 Ozone filter 1 Ozone filter 55YA7350 2 Fixing filter 55GA7337 2 check 1 Every 400 000 copies or prints Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Material used ing cation ment Supply Tools sed 1 By pass 1 Double feed prevention roller paper feed 54004056 section 2 Separation roller 54004056 3 Paper feed roller 25BA4032 2 Fixing unit 1 Fixing claw lower 54005310 Q 2 Fixing roller lower 55GA5304 3 Fixing bearing upper
79. Setting Phone Number of the Service Center This function displays the telephone and fax numbers of the service center which is indicated on the screen if a service call is required This function is not related to KRDS functions It is designed only for indicating the data on the screen 1 Setting phone and fax number of the service center Select 7 Service TEL No in the 25 mode screen Service center number setting screen will appear Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 7 Service TEL No key 3 Service TEL No screen Press the TEL to set the phone number and the FAX key to set the FAX number and input the number Max 21 digits using the numeric keys on the screen 4 When input has been mistaken rewrite it after moving the cursor with or key or delete all with the Stop clear button to input again 5 Press the SET key to enter the number that has been entered 6 Press the RETURN key to return to the 25 mode menu screen Caution When pressing the key without pressing the key the setting is complete However the new phone number will not be entered and the 25 mode menu screen will return 25 ADJUSTMENT 9 Setting the Serial Number This function is used to display set and change the serial number of the main body and optional units The serial numbers can be read from KRDS 1 Ser
80. TS 190 Signals Input signals TH1 ANG 1 2 TH1 to PRDB TH1 output signal This signal outputs voltage that is proportional to the surface temperature at the center of the fixing roller upper This signal is used for temperature control and also for detecting an abnormally high temperature or other abnormality TH2 ANG 1 2 TH2 to PRDB TH2 output signal This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the surface temperature at the end of the fixing roller upper It is not directly related to temperature control but is used for detecting an abnormality Output signals L2 DRIVE DCPS1 to L2 L2 AC N supply line The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L2 CONT L3 DRIVE DCPS1 to L3 L3 AC N supply line The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L3 CONT L2 CONT PRDB to DCPS1 L2 ON OFF control signal L L2 ON H L2 OFF L3 CONT PRDB to DCPS1 L3 ON OFF control signal L L8 ON H L3 OFF RL CONT PRDB to DCPS1 RL main ON OFF control signal L RL ON H RL OFF REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION 1 Composition Switching guide Switching guide Paper exit cover upper Paper exit roller Sl Paper exit Paper exit cover reversal roller Conveyance upper roller Conveyance roller Reversal roller Paper exit cover lower Conveyance
81. Timing adjustment Restart timing adjustment Restart timing adjustment RADF face side Restart timing adjustment RADF back side The same as 36 mode 8 RADF Adjustment Paper loop adjustment Paper feed loop amount adjustment All Paper feed loop amount adjustment ADU small size Paper feed loop amount adjustment ADU large size Paper feed loop amount adjustment Main body tray small size Paper feed loop amount adjustment Main body tray large size Paper feed loop amount adjustment DB Paper feed loop amount adjustment By pass ordinary paper Paper feed loop amount adjustment By pass thick paper Paper feed loop amount adjustment ADU Paper feed loop amount adjustment FCOT After making an adjustment print the SGU pattern No 16 Paper feed loop amount adjustment RADF face side Paper feed loop amount adjustment RADF back side The same as 36 mode 8 RADF Adjustment Lead edge adjustment None After making an adjustment make copy Centering adjustment Centering adjustment All Centering adjustment Main body tray Centering adjustment DB upper Centering adjustment DB middle Centering adjustment DB lower Centering adjustment By pass After making an adjustment print the SGU pattern No 16 1 33 36 ADJUSTMENT
82. after the specified time from when MC1 registration goes ON and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration going OFF Transfer A positive DC high voltage is used for transfer Separation An AC high voltage is used for separation 2 F 3 Signals Input signals F T SIG HV2 to PRDB L is output when the transfer spark detection circuit operates F S SIG HV2 to PRDB L is output when the separation spark detection circuit operates CORONA UNIT SECTION Output signals T CONT PRDB to HV2 Transfer corona unit ON OFF control signal When this signal is L the transfer corona unit goes ON T SHIFT PRDB to HV2 Transfer corona unit output level control signal This signal controls the transfer corona unit output level using analog signals from the PRDB printer drive board T SHIFT output range 4to 10 V Transfer voltage output range 40 to 450 uA S CONT PRDB to HV2 Separation corona unit ON OFF control signal When this signal is L the separation corona unit goes ON 5 SHIFT PRDB to HV2 Separation corona unit output level control signal This signal controls the separation corona unit output level AC component using analog signals from the PRDB S SHIFT AG output range 4to 10 V Separation AC voltage 2 8 to 5 5 kV output range S SHIFT DC PRDB to HV2 Separation corona unit output level control signal This signal con
83. after the specified time from the completion of charging control MC2 developing goes ON after the specified time from when M3 goes and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration going OFF 2 G 2 Signals Input signal LD M3 to PRDB rotational status detection signal This signal becomes L when M3 reaches the set speed Output signals CONT PRDB to M3 drive control signal L M3 ON H M3 OFF CLK to M3 rotational speed control reference clock signal MODE PRDB to M3 rotational speed switching signal L High speed H Low speed MC2 DRIVE PRDB to MC2 MC2 drive control signal L MC2 ON H MC2 OFF 4 Developing Bias Control DEVELOPING UNIT CLK LD 24VDC PGND B CONT B SHIFT SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC The developing bias is controlled by the PRDB printer drive board via the HV2 high voltage unit 2 Operation The developing bias is applied to the sleeve after the specified time from when the developing goes ON and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration going OFF Signals Output signals B CONT PRDB to HV2 Developing bias ON OFF control signal When this signal is L the developing bias goes ON and a high voltage is output B SHIFT PRDB to HV2 Developing bias level control signal This signal controls the output level of the developing bias by
84. amount adjustment Leading edge original erasure adjustment Centering adjustment Image read point adjustment PWM Gamma adjustment RADF scanning density adjustment Non image area erase check Drum count reset E RDH memory check Drum Developer Charging control plate High voltage unit 1 Write unit Parameter memory board Rubber roller for paper feed unit RADF RADF slit glass original glass 1 Expansion memory LCT DB 608 paper size setting Toner control sensor board New means replace with new part and Re means to reinstall the part The circles will appear above a number when there is an adjustment priority 1 When the PRMB parameter memory board is replaced remember to replaced the developer before conducting the L detection adjustment 2 After replacing the developer be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first carried out L detection adjustment 1 2 MODE SELECT MENU Each adjustment mode is selected by conducting special operations 1 Setting Method The following modes can be selected on the screen without turning OFF ON the power switch 1 Normal mode 2 Adjustment mode 36 mode 3 Memory setting mode 25 mode 4 Key ope mode Key operator mode 5 check mode 47 6 Exit Operation procedure
85. and OFF operations When the main power of the copier is OFF however the KRDS circuit is not powered and does not initialize the modem after the modem power ON and OFF operations Some types of modem cannot start communica tion with KRDS unless they are initialized by the KRDS KRDS 6 ASCII Code Table ASCII is 1 byte code specified by ANSI enables indication of control code alphabet and number charader binary Bos character binary Men character binary Me character binary Pen fooooiooo0 o 00100000 20 le 010010000 40 0110 0000 60 sH 0000 0001 1 1 001010001 21 01000001 41 01100001 sx 0000010 2 00100010 22 42 o 0110 0010 62 00000011 4 01 1 23 0100 0011 011000111 ET 0000i0100 4 0010 0100 24 D 0100 0100 44 a 0110 0100 64 Eq 0000 0101 5 0010 0101 25 E 0100 0101 45 e 01100101 65 AK 0000 0110 6 00100110 26 F 010000110 46 t 01100110 66 BL 00000111 7 ootoottt 27 0100 0111 47 9 01100111 67 0000 1000 8 n 0010 1000 28 H 0100 1000 48 n 0110 1000 68 IHT 0000 1001 9 1001010
86. controlled by the control board Related signal is PS1 paper exit Operation This machine counts copies by means of two software counters Paper feed counter The count increases by 1 each time the 151 paper feed goes ON Paper exit counter The count increases by 1 each time PS1 goes ON OFF lt Operation of each counter gt a Copy quantity display counter on OB operation board Normal Indicates the count on the paper feed counter Paper jam Indicates the count on the paper exit counter 2 N 7 24VDC C T DRIVE 24VDC C K SIG SGND C K DRIVE PS1 SIG Signals Input signal C K SIG C K to CB This signal informs the CB that the count on C K has increased Output signals C T DRIVE CB to C T C T drive signal When this signal changes from L to H the count of C T increases by 1 C K DRIVE CB to C K C K drive signal When this signal changes from L to H the count of C K increases by 1 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL 6 Option Control In this machine all options except for coin vender are controlled by the CB control board and ICB image control board 2 N 8 1 Operation RADF FNS and DB contain a CB Data is exchanged between each CB and the main body ICB Coin vender is controlled by the PRDB printer drive board lt Operation output timing of coin vender signal gt OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL
87. driven by separate motors in order to improve the serviceability of the drum unit and also to improve the developing performance 2 B 1 DRIVE SECTION 3 M1 Main Control M1 main is controlled by the PRDB printer drive board Operation M1 is 24 V drive DC motor which drives the conveyance section 2nd paper feed section fixing section and conveyance belt 1 is PLL controlled by feedback signals from speed sensor installed inside M1 itself maintaining it at a constant speed M1 goes ON after the specified time from when the Start print button is pressed and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration going OFF at the final copy exit 2 B 2 5VDC CONT LOCK SIG SGND 1 CLK SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC Signals Input signals LOCK SIG M1 to PRDB M1 rotational status detection signal This signal becomes L when M1 reaches the set speed PS16 SIG PS16 to PRDB Paper detection signal used for detecting the paper feed temporary stop position PS16 goes ON and outputs H when paper is detected at the paper feed temporary stop position Output signals CONT PRDB to M1 M1 drive control signal M1 ON OFF 1 CLK PRDB to 1 Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M1 4 M4 Drum Control DRIVE SECTION CB 5VDC CONT LOCK SIG SGND M4 CLK drum is controlled by the PRDB printer drive board
88. function activated APS DATA 2 PS25 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected APS DATA 3 526 to SCDB to ICB Paper size detection signal L Paper is detected H Paper is not detected 2 C 7 READ SEGTION 7 AES Control When an AE scanning takes place the CCD sensor installed on the ADB A D converter board reads the original density and the ICB image control board performs processing corresponding to the read results and selects the optimum correction curve for the original reproduction This operation is called AE control The selection of this y correction curve is done by the CPU on the ICB READ SEGTION 1 Operation a AES detection operation 1 During platen copy operation When the Start button is pressed an AE scanning takes place and the density of the original is read over the following range lt AES sampling range gt 1 When RADF is open Range of non image area erace mode or the inside of the area detected by the APS 2 When RADF is closed Range of 20 mm inward of the original size detected by the APS If the original size cannot be determined by the APS a range of 20 mm inward of the minimum original size set for the particular shipping destination of the machine 2 During a DF copy operation The image at the leading edge of the original is read by the original feed operation
89. is different from the keys then press the key to store the standard value enter a value from the numeric keys adjustment value 5 then press the SET key to store the adjustment value Input range 50 reduction to 50 enlargement Input range 20 reduction to 20 enlargement 1 step 0 05 1 step 0 05 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification becomes the standard value becomes the standard value 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the or BACK key to select the desired NEXT BACK to select the desired adjustment adjustment 12 Press the key to return to the timing 12 Press the key to return adj screen to the timing adj screen Standard value 0 5 or less life size Within 1 0 mm with respect to 200 mm Standard value 0 5 or less life size Within 1 0 mm with respect to 205 7 mm lt 200 PE Ue 1 39 36 ADJUSTMENT Platen horizontal magnification adjustment d RADF vertical magnification adjustment Step Operation procedure Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj Press the 2 Timing adj key 3 Timing adj screen 3 Ti
90. is dump output in both the HEX and ASCII format 36 ADJUSTMENT 9 Adjustment of RADF Adjustments of RADF are performed in the following procedures For the adjustment A3 or 11 x 17 copy paper should be used 1 Select the 8 RADF adj from the 36 Mode Menu Screen to display the RADF adjustment menu RADF adjustment menu Vertical magnification Drum clock adjustment Restart timing adjustment Paper loop adjustment Centering adjustment aR RADF scanning density adjustment Press the key corresponding to the desired item The screen corresponding to the selected item will appear Using the NEXT and BACK keys select the item to be adjusted The selected item will be indicated in the message display area on the screen Enter desired value from the numeric keys on the screen then press the key to validate your entry Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the COPY key then make a test copy from the basic screen Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the desired adjustment screen If the output does not conform to the standard enter a desired value again from the numeric keys then make a test copy When the output satisfies the standard proceed to adjustment of the next item When the adjustment 5 complete press the RETURN key to return to the RADF adj screen 1 64 Adjustment of vertical magnification Drum clock Select
91. leakage prevention sheets 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all of the developer has been supplied to the developing unit 9 Rotate the developing drive input gear 2 in the counterclockwise direction and check that the devel oper bristles along the entire length of the developing sleeve 10 Install the developing cover 11 Check that the toner leakage prevention sheet is not caught by the developing unit cover 12 Install the developing unit on the drum unit 3 G 3 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Cartridge a Procedure 1 Open the front door then swing out the toner supply unit 2 Pullthe pressure lever then remove the toner cartridge SM BON NEL x fg if Ser l ZH IJ LI t Toner cartridge Pressure lever 3 Reinstallthe toner cartridge in the opposite sequence to removal 8 H 1 TONER SUPPLY UNIT CLEANING TONER UNIT CLEANING TONER RECYCLE UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Cleaning Blade Caution Caution 1 Caution 2 Caution 3 Caution 4 Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade with bare hands Push down both ends of the toner collection sheet towards you and confirm that the entire drum is in contact without any space When installing the drum and cleaning blade apply setting powder to the entire
92. means of analog signals from the PRDB B SHIFT output range 2to8V Bias voltage output range 400 to 700 VDC 2 G 3 DEVELOPING UNIT 5 Toner Density Control CLK LD 24V 24V TDS CONT 12VDC TONER ANG SIG SGND SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC 24VDC MC2 DRIVE The toner density is controlled by the TDS toner density sensor M11 toner supply 2 and the PRDB printer drive board 1 Operation a Toner density detection The TDS detects the density of the toner in the developing unit using an L detection method and outputs an analog voltage signal that is proportion to the density to the PRDB The PRDB compares the detected voltage with the reference voltage corresponding to the initial density of the developer and judges the necessity of supplying toner 2 G 4 Toner supply operation to the developing unit M11 is driven by 24 VDC supplied from the PRDB When the power is switched ON After the power is switched ON and the agitator screw is driven by the M3 developing via the MC2 developing then after the specified time the toner density is read This density is compared with the initial density of the developer and if the density is low M11 goes ON and toner supply takes place recovered until its initial density During a copy operation The relationship between the TDS output voltage and the toner supply time is as follows
93. not to lose small parts Care should also be taken notto install machine parts in wrong places Do not operate the machine before installing all the disassembled parts completely Removalof some screwsis prohibited inthis section Neverloosen them EXTERNAL SECTION 1 Replacing the Ozone Filter Caution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet a Procedure 1 Remove the one set screw then remove the rear cover 2 Remove the two set screws holding the conveyance suction FM4 2 D I Ne P Conveyance suction Rear cover 2 Set screw Pull out the conveyance suction towards you Do not strain the wires during this process Replacing the ozone filter 1 gt Hook Filter retainer When reinstall the toner filter place the label on the outside Ozone filter Conveyance suction 3 1 EXTERNAL SEGTION 5 Reinstallthe ozone filter inthe opposite sequence to removal Filter retainer CH FMA Ozone filter Hook Caution 1 When installing the ozone filter ensure that the hook is at the front as shown in the figure Caution 2 sure to install the filter retainer EXTERNAL SEGTION 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Rear Cover Procedure Remove the ten set screws then remove the rear cover Rear cover Set screws Set screws
94. outputs the font list built in the engine 3 Memory dump list This option is used to dump out data in HEX and ASCII format after the address specified in E RDH memory this list is referenced for troubleshooting Normally not used 4 Management list This option outputs the machine status counter information and history of jam and so on Page No 1 to 10 5 Adjustment list This option outputs a list of current adjusting values in the 25 36 mode Page No 1 to 4 6 Loglist 1 The data from the memory is dumped in the HEX format and the ASCII format for analyzing trouble Normally not used 7 Log list 2 The data from the memory is dumped in the HEX format and the ASCII format for anayzing trouble Normally not used 1 63 Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 7 List print key 3 List print screen Press the key corresponding to the desired menu option 4 List print screen When outputting the memory dump list specify the start and end addresses Note 5 Press the key 6 Basic screen Press the start print button to output the list 7 Press the C button while pressing the P button then press the RETURN key The list print screen will re appear 8 When outputting another list repeat above steps 3 to 8 9 Press the RETURN key to return to the 36 Mode Menu Screen Note The memory dump list
95. p Remove the fixing unit from the main body Open the paper exit roller unit upper Remove the four set screws then open the oil supply unit in the upward direction and remove it in the direc tion of the arrow GNI Set screws Oil supply unit Paper exit roller unit upper FIXING UNIT 4 Remove the two E rings front and rear then remove 4 Removing and Reinstalling the the fixing cleaning roller i 5 Remove the two pressure springs front and rear Fixing Roller upper 6 Remove the two E rings and fixing cleaning bearings front and rear then remove the fixing roller A Caution When installing the fixing roller A be careful of the mounting direction Caution When replacing the heat insulation sleeve apply tri fluorocarbon to the inside of the heat insulation sleeve and insert it into the fixing roller upper Pr r Fixing cleaning bearing E rings Bearing 1 Remove the fixing unit from the main body and remove a the oil supply unit from the fixing unit Fixing cleaning roller v 2 Remove the two fixing heater lamps 3 Remove the four set screws then remove the heater mount plate rear from the fixing unit i 3 Atthis time place the fixing unit on a stable platform the 2 Pressure extent to which is 5 cm and do not strain the bind wiring gt Spring from the fixing unit E ring de Serial No side we oan r r
96. processed so that the relationship between the original density and the copy density is 9 255 linear Original density signal Copy density 2 G 7 DEVELOPING UNIT 1 1 2 1 Contents of implementation During initial adjustment adjustment by the service mode During image quality adjustment in the 36 mode an SGU test pattern before gradation correction is output and read by the scanner CCD and memorized For details refer to the Adjustment section in Field Service During normal operation automatic adjustment Toner patch patterns gradation patterns of different densities are formed on the drum and each toner patch density is read by the Dmax sensor and memorized as drum gradation data The gradation correction value is computed based on the gradation data of the SGU test pattern read by the CCD and the drum gradation data read by the Dmax sensor and used to optimally correct the laser output Implementation timing Initial adjustment When the drum PRMB parameter memory board or TCSB toner control sensor board developer is replaced Normal operation a When the power is switched ON b At 500 copies 2 G 8 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 1 Composition TONER SUPPLY UNIT Toner cartridge Shutter Pressure lever 2 Mechanisms Toner cartridge Mechanisms Methods Toner supply motor 1 Toner supply Screw conveyance Toner level det
97. registration pulley bracket upwards direction up towards original feed flow Note Make sure that the registration pulley shaft does not touch the open close cover spring holder unit Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the original skew is within specified range 0 5 or less Specified range Paper skew 0 5 or less Paper skew in the paper feed direction OTHER ADJUSTMENT 2 Back side of original paper skew adjustment Open close cover R range adjustment plate Set screw Step Operation procedure Make a copy in the single sided single sided copy mode then check the skew of the original Either pattern A or B Image Copy paper feed direction Copy Ed Paper skew pattern A skew pattern A Paper skew pattern B Open the open close cover Loosen the set screw and release the R range adjustment plate Move the R range adjustment plate one calibration in the direction below according to the paper skew pattern For skew in pattern A Move the R range adjustment plate to the left side For skew in pattern B Move the R range adjustment plate to the right side Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the original skew is within specified range 0 596 or less Specified range Paper skew 0 5 or less Paper skew in the paper feed direction 7 Tray 2 3 Belt Tension Adjustment
98. return to the KRDS setting menu screen On the KRDS setting screen select the 5 KRDS Setup calling to display the KRDS setup calling screen Caution If the KRDS software SW 33 0 Set up flag is not selected to 0 not yet The KRDS setup calling screen can not be selected 2 Setting method a Press the key in the screen a Communication message Calling the host for setup Communicating Caution Do not turn OFF the power during communication b Completion message Calling the host for setup Communication completed b Turn off the power if no completion message is displayed in ten minutes Check that the host computer starting up correct host telephone number cable connection etc then open to calling the host for setup screen again to press the key c Turn off the power to end the operation Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the key 3 KRDS setting screen Press the 4 KRDS software SW set key 4 KRDS software SW set screen Use thea key to select the switch number to 33 and bit number 0 5 Check that bit data indicates 0 not set to 0 to press the key 6 Press the RETURN key to return to the KRDS setting screen 7 KRDS setting screen Press the 5 KRDS Setup calling key 8 KRDS Setup calling screen Press the Start key Check the message on the screen 9 Turn
99. roller Paper exit cover lower 2 Mechanisms Reversal paper exit operation Paper is conveyed down the paper exit cover lower Mechanisms Methods by the switching guide When the trailing edge of the Paper path switching 1 Switching gate paper passes the switching guide the paper exit Paper conveyance Roller conveyance reversal roller rotates in the reverse direction and the paper is exited face down 1 Paper path switching Paper exited from the fixing unit of the main body is divided to straight paper exit and reversal paper exit by the switching guide Switching guide The switching guide is operated by ON OFF of the gate SD SD5 Paper exit reversal roller Paper exit cover lower 2 L 1 REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SEGTION b ADU reversal operation Paper is conveyed down the paper exit cover lower by the switching guide When the trailing edge of the paper passes the reversal guide the reversal roller rotates in the reverse direction and the paper is conveyed to the ADU stacker Switching guide Reversal roller ADU 2 L 2 3 Reversal Paper Exit Control REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION SD5 DRIVE INPORT SGND 529 SIG 5VDC SGND PS1 SIG 5VDC Reversal and paper exit section switches the paper path to straight paper exit or reversal paper exit by th
100. screen will return to calling time set menu screen c Enter the number with the numeric keys as follows The month and day are entered by inputting 2 digit number Example 1 is entered as 01 The time is entered using 24 hour clock Example 1 00p m is entered as 13 The time is entered using 24 hour clock Example 1 00p m is entered as 13 Example Monthly mode 10 17 10 Weekly mode day 17 10 Daily mode 17 10 Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 10 KRDS setting key 3 KRDS setting screen Press the 1 Calling time set key 4 Calling time set screen Use the 2 Calling mode 2 regular time calling setting 5 Calling mode 2 regular time calling screen Press the any key in monthly weekly daily keys 6 Using the numeric keys on the screen enter the day hour and minute Item that can be input differs from depend on the mode 7 Press SET 8 Press the RETURN to end the setting KRDS 3 Setting regular count calling The copier will call the host at the regular count specified 1 Screen selection Select the 3 Calling mode 3 regular count in the calling time set screen to display the Calling mode 3 regular count call screen Press the RETURN key to exit the Calling mode 3 Regular count call screen and return to the calling tim
101. set screw then pull out the paper feed unit with the rail as guide of the paper feed tray toward you Relay connector CN81 Relay connector CN80 Set screw Paper feed door 4 Remove the four set screws then remove the by pass paper feed unit Set screws Set screws By pass paper feed unit S Reinstall the by pass paper feed unit in the opposite sequence to removal Set screw Paper feed unit Paper feed tray 3 Reinstall the paper feed unit in the opposite sequence to removal Caution Be sure to make a copy after installing the paper feed unit and check that paper is fed normally If the rocking gear is not held by the 1st paper feed solenoid the paper feed is not made normally PAPER FEED UNIT 3 Replacing the By pass Paper Feed Rubber a Procedure 1 Remove the by pass paper feed unit 2 Remove the one stop ring and bearing Stop ring Bearing 6 3 Press the plunger of the by pass SD 504 until claw of the by pass solenoid releases from the gear of the torque limiter 4 Pull out the by pass drive shaft while pressing the plunger of the by pass SD then remove the by pass paper feed roller 5 Remove the by pass paper feed rubber from the by pass paper feed roller By pass paper feed rubber By pass paper feed roller By pass drive shaft
102. specified time from PS16 registration going OFF Charging A Scorotron charging method is used 24 VDC input from the DCPS1 DC power supply 1 is raised to a negative DC high voltage which is then discharged Charging correction by means of the grid voltage The grid voltage is output from HV1 to the charging control plate 2 F 2 Signals Input signal F C SIG HV1 to PRDB L is output when the spark detection circuit operates and the charging output forcibly goes OFF Output signals C CONT PRDB to HV1 Charging and grid voltage ON OFF control signal L Charging and grid voltage ON H Charging and grid voltage OFF C SHIFT PRDB to HV1 The charging corona unit output level is controlled by means of analog signals from the PRDB 410 10 V 550 to 1200 C SHIFT output range Charging output range G SHIFT PRDB to HV1 The charging grid voltage output level is controlled by analog signals from the PRDB 4to 10 V 500 to 900 V G SHIFT output range Grid voltage output range 4 Transfer Separation Control CORONA UNIT SECTION SEPARATION TCONT TSHIFT S CONT S AC SHIFT S DC SHIFT F T SIG F S SIG 24VDC MC1 DRIVE SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC Transfer and separation corona unit are controlled by the PRDB printer drive board and HV2 high voltage unit 2 Operation Transfer and separation corona discharge go ON
103. surface of the drum and also the cleaning blade regardless of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old type parts Once the drum has been applied with setting powder carry out the following work before installing the drum unit to the main body To obtain the correct toner density clean setting powder leakage on the surface of the sensor on the toner control sensor board with an alcohol damped cloth a Procedure Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section Remove the charging corona unit Refer to Corona unit section Remove the developing unit and drum from the drum casing Remove the two set screws then remove the cleaning blade Cleaning blade 55 D Set Set screw screw 5 Reinstall the cleaning blade in the opposite sequence to removal PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the By pass Paper Feed Unit NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Procedure Remove the side cover right Remove the two relay connectors CN80 CN81 of the by pass paper feed unit Remove the one set screw then remove the paper feed door PAPER FEED UNIT 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed Unit NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Procedure Pull out ADU and the paper feed tray in the forward direction Remove the one
104. that takes place when the Start button is pressed and the read data is used to perform density measurement AES sampling range 1 Main scanning direction A range of 20 mm inward of the original size detected by the APS f the original size cannot be determined by the APS a range of 20 mm inward of the minimum original size set for the particular shipping destination of the machine 2 Sub scanning direction Range between 1 5 mm and 2 9 mm from the leading edge of the original 2 C 8 WRITE UNIT WRITE UNIT 1 Composition Write mirror Dust proof glass Index mirror Cylindrical lens 2 fo lens Index sensor board Laser drive board Polygon mirror Cylindrical lens 1 2 Mechanisms Oylindrical lens 2 Write mirror Mechanisms Methods fe lens Scan 1 Polygon mirror Polygon mirror Rotational speed 49606 3 rpm is i i ust proo Light source Laser diode 1 me glass Output 5 mW PEN CL Wavelength 780 nm PE c Positioning Index sensor 1 Path of laser beam Collimator lens unit The light output from the semiconductor laser is sent Index mirror to the OPC drum via the collimator lens cylindrical Laser diode lens 1 polygon mirror 0 lens cylindrical lens 2 and write mirror Write mirror Polygon mirror an Oylindrical lens 2 dr
105. the 0 IL drum with the bare hands I a Procedure ET 1 Remove the drum unit from the main body PAL em Refer to Drum unit section 2 Remove the drum from the drum unit in LIA e 3 Disconnect the relay connector CN62 and free the X NS wiring from the cord clamps A 4 Remove the Separation swing spring and the two P i positioning screws then remove the separation claws unit gt Cu Separation Separation claws unit claw Separation fulcrum shaft 7 Reinstallthe separation claws inthe opposite sequence to removal Separation Positioning swing spring Relay connector Screws CN62 Cord clamps Caution Take care not to lose the collar of the positioning screw 3 E 4 CORONA UNIT SECTION CORONA UNIT SECTION 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Charging Corona Unit and PCL NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Caution If you installed the PCL ensure that it is securely tightened Procedure Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section Disconnect the relay connector CN62 from the drum unit Liftup the charging corona unit at the rear side first then while moving it to the rear raise the front side Remove the PCL from the hooks of the charging corona unit Hook Charging corona unit PCL Relay connector CN62 S Reinstall the char
106. the 8 RADF adj from the 36 Mode Menu Screen to display the RADF Adjustment Menu Select 1 Drum clock adj from this screen and the Magnifica tion Screen will appear Using the NEXT and BACK will allow you to select the following items RADF vertical magnification adjustment 50 RADF vertical magnification adjustment 100 RADF vertical magnification adjustment 200 RADF vertical magnification adjustment 400 Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on the screen then press the key to validate your entry Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the COPY key then make a test copy from the Basic Screen Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the magnification adjustment screen If the output does not conform to the standard enter a desired value again from the numeric keys then make a test copy When the output satisfies the standard proceed to adjustment of the next item Step Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 8 RADF adj key RADF adj screen Press the 1 Drum clock adj Drum clock adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired adjustment item appears Press the COPY Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on RADF then select an A3 or 11 x 17 copy paper Then press the start button to make copy Measure vertical magnifi
107. the 8 RADF adj key RADF adj screen Press the 2 Restart Timing key Restart timing adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired adjustment item appears Press the COPY Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on RADF then select an A3 or 11 x 17 copy paper Then press the start button to make copy Check the output for the restart timing Standard value 3 0 mm or less Life size Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the restart timing adj screen Restart timing adj screen When the restart timing does not comply with the standard value enter the value from the numeric keys then press thel SET key to validate it Input range 50 delays the timing to 50 advances the timing 1 step 0 1 mm 10 Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing meets the standard value 11 You can select another item for the adjustment from the NEXT and BACK keys 12 Press the RETURN to return to the RADF adj screen 36 ADJUSTMENT 3 Paper feed loop adjustment Adjustment of the RADF loop amount is done in the following procedures Select the 8 RADF adj from the 36 Mode Menu Screen to display the RADF Adjustment Menu Screen Select the 3 Paper loop adj from this screen to display the paper feed loop adjustment screen Using the NEXT
108. the startofthe warm up Fixing senser open circuit detection circuit oper ates F36 2 TH2 fixing temperature 2 is bro ken open circuit Fixing sensor open circuit detection circuit oper ates The machine stops immedi ately and main relay and 24VDC are turned OFF Set to 1 the bit 1 in SW3 PRDB printer drive board DCPS1 DC power supply1 1 fixing temperature 1 2 fixing temperature 2 L2 fixing heater lamp 1 L3 fixing heater lamp 2 Scanner abnormality F40 1 The errror of SRGA is detected 41 1 Atthe start of optics initial search or reverse scanning PS3 optics HP is not turned ON within certain period Scanner stops immediately and 24VDC is turned OFF ICB image control board ICB image control board SCDB scanner drive board PS3 optics HP 6 6 JAM ERROR CODES Classifica Warn Operation in case of Causes Estimated abnormal parts tion ing code warning occurrence Image F46 1 The monitor value of the laser The machine stops immedi ICB image control board processing light amount is low ately and main relay and LDB laser drive board abnormality F46 8 Index cycle differs from the 24VDC are turned OFF ICB image control board expectation INDEXSB index sensor board M5 polygon F46 10 AOG counter over
109. the switch No 33 and bit No 0 indicates 1 finished 15 Turn off the SW1 main power and SW2 sub power of the copier KRDS 2 Setting the KRDS connection recognition 1 3 Plug the power cord of the copier to the outlet When the SW1 main power and SW2 sub power of the copier remain off Turn on the SW1 when the SW2 remains off Turn on the SW2 while pressing 2 and 5 of the copy quantity setting buttons simultaneously Select the 1 Software SW key on the 25 mode menu screen Select the bit No 6 of the switch No 12 and then press the key ON KRDS recognize KRDS not recognized Caution If the copier software SW 12 6 KRDS recognition is not selected to 1 the menu of the KRDS can not be selected Initializing KRDS memory Turn off the SW2 when the SW1 remains on Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7 of the copy quantity setting buttons simultaneously Press the start print button after pressing the copy quantity setting button 1 5 and P button then 9 8 finally P button again check mode lt 15 098 gt IN OUT NOW NOW indication will be changed to FIN on the message display Turn off the SW2 4 Setting KRDS software SW This function allows adjustment of the KRDS software switches Caution Adjust the software switch while checking the switch an
110. to removal Caution 1 Caution 2 Caution 3 Caution 4 When installing the registration bearing lower flange section is directed downwards Removing and reinstalling the registration spring with hooked the both ends of the spring When installing the registration spring the hook section is between the registration bearing upper and registration bearing lower When installing the registration clutch insert the clutch retainer into the groove of the stopper section 3 J 8 FIXING UNIT FIXING UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Unit N Caution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet N Caution Because the fixing unit is extremely hot soon after its switch is turned OFF ensure that the fixing unit has cooled down sufficiently before working on it Caution After uninstalling the fixing unit make sure to screw the set screw Procedure Open the front door then remove the one set screw holding the fixing unit Hold the fixing knob and pull out If it will not pull out in the horizontal direction lift it up a little while pulling it out Set screw Fixing unit Fixing knob 3 Reinstall the fixing unit in the opposite sequence to removal 3 K 1 2 Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps 1 and 2 L2 and L3 Caution Do not touch the fixing heater lamp with the bare hands Caution 1 Inst
111. to the timing Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen adj screen 1 47 4 Running Test Mode 36 ADJUSTMENT Print out the various internal test pattern Select the 3 Running mode in the 36 mode menu screen then the running test mode menu screen will appear The following items can be selected 1 Running mode 1 Intermittent copy mode Running mode 1 is an intermittent copy mode In this mode after the set number of copy operations has been completed the machine goes into the copy ready status waits 0 5 sec then starts the same operation again Running mode 2 Paperless intermittent copy mode Running mode 2 is a paperless intermittent copy mode It makes copies at roughly the same timing as for a normal copy without performing paper detection or jam detection Also like running mode 1 after the set number of copy operations has been completed the machine goes into the copy ready status waits 0 5 sec then starts the same operation again Running mode 3 Paperless mode Running mode 3 is a paperless mode It makes copies at roughly the same timing as for a normal copy without performing paper detection or jam dection Running mode 4 Paperless endless mode Running mode 4 is a paperless endless mode automatically sets the copy quantity to infinity Also like running mode 3 it makes copies at roughly the same timing as for a normal copy
112. tray 18 4 DB tray middle lifting abnormality DB middle tray 18 5 DB tray lower lifting abnormality DB lower tray 51 7 ADU feed motor abnormality ADU Duplex mode can not be selected 60 0 67 1 to 3 RADF abnormality RADF RADF can not be used 70 1 FNS communication abnormality FNS FNS can not be used 77 1 to 7 77 10 77 30 FNS tray tray 2 and 3 abnormality Tray 2 and 3 FNS Tray 2 and 3 FNS can not be used 77 8 to 9 77 21 77 22 Stapler abnormality FNS Stapler FNS Stapler mode can not be selected 87 2 87 3 IP 431 communication abnormality IP Printer can not be used APPENDIX 7045 Overall Wiring Diagrams 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 1 7 1001 XE 24 24V B ni 12 008 5 A2 24V B 9 13 1008 45 24V B 5 2 A 4 P GND B 9 14 1008 74 A 5 P GND B nis 15 5008 48 A 6 P GND B us 3 10043 7 sv 4 00 4 CD A 8 S GND gt i A 9 DDF MTXD CEA 6 10046 10 DDF MREQ 11 DDF_MACK A12 DDF SRXD 13 DDF SREQ 1 DDF SACK 8 2 DDF VALID u 1008 45 188 gt 188 B 3 NC De 1 24 8 4 FNS SACK 1887 Sp ni B 5 FNS MACK G 2 6 FNS SRXD SCDB pe m 7 FNS SREQ CERO EN Ga B 8 FNS_MREQ CE de
113. 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 Toner level detection Supply toner indication 4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 Number of copies allowed before machine stops 74 0 0 0 Sia 3 after Supply Toner indication 1 1 1 4 Non display of advance delete keys for job list 9 Display Do not display 0 0 0 5 Job stop or nonstop at no toner 4 Does not stop Stops 1 1 1 6 Impossibility of coping reservation to coin vender Can reserve copying Cannot reverse copying 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 Destination switchover 510 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 3 mE 0 0 0 4 Detecting method of 8 5 x 11 Letter size on The size is detects as 8 5 x 11 Letter If original reaches to RADF s PS307 0 0 0 SW5 RADF even if the original reaches to RADF s original detect PS 2 the size is 5307 original detect PS 2 detected as 8 5 x 14 Legal 5 Control temperature change 11 0 6 7 For improved half tone fixing performance when No Yes 0 0 0 the machine is first switched on in the morning Prevention of faulty image at high temperature Yes No 0 0 0 and high humidity When the machine is not turned on for a long period 1 K size selection switch for Taiwan destination AB series sizes K sizes available 0 0 0 2 Paper feed control when thick paper is used 12 0 0 0 SW6 3 0 0 0 4 Polygon motor low speed rotation timing 13 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 Polygon motor pre rotation selection 14 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 1 7
114. 01 29 1001001 49 i 0110 1001 69 LF 00004010 A gt 00101010 2a 4 01004010 4A i 0110i1010 6a B 2 0100 1011 0110 1011 ct Joooo t100 c 2c L 0100 1100 4c 1 0110 1100 6c 0000 1101 1 1 1 20 01001101 m 0110 1101 so 00004110 oo101110 N ot00 1110 4 n si joo 7 1 111 2F o ot004111 o 0110111 DE 0001 0000 10 0 0011i0000 0 0101 0000 so p 0111 0000 70 01 0001 0001 11 1 0011 0001 31 a o1010001 51 a 011110001 71 De 0001 0010 12 2 1001110010 32 1010010 52 011110010 72 ps 0001 0011 13 3 00110011 5 0101 0011 53 5 011110011 73 04 0001 0100 14 4 0011 0100 34 T 0101 0100 54 110100 74 INK 0001 0101 15 5 1001110101 35 u 0101 0101 55 0111 0101 75 sn 0001 0110 16 6 001110110 36 v 010110110 56 v 0111 0110 76 0001 0111 17 7 00ttiottt 37 0101 0111 57 011110111 77 lon 0001 1000 18 0011 1000 38 0101 1000 58 x 0111 1000 78 0001 1001 19 9 00111001 ot0ti1001 59 11 1001 79 Ise ooo13010 1A ootti1010
115. 08 is installed Centering adjustment By pass Centering adjustment ADU common Centering adjustment ADU L Centering adjustment ADU M Centering adjustment ADU S Centering adjustment ADU SS Centering adjustment Platen Centering adjustment RADF face side Centering adjustment RADF back side Caution 1 ADU centering adjustment can be taking place for each paper size L B4 11 x 17 11 x 14 F4 M BSR 8 5 x 11R S A4 B5 8 5 x 11 SS 5 5 x 8 5R Caution 2 ADU centering adjustment for each paper is the offset adjustment from the ADU common 36 ADJUSTMENT a Each tray centering adjustment Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the key Timing adj screen Press the 5 Centring adj key Centring adj screen Press NEXT key until the desired tray appears in the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Set A3 or 11 x 17 size paper in the tray to be adjusted and select this tray Then press the start print button to print the SGU pattern Fold the output SGU pattern at the center in the paper feed direction and check that the left and right lines overlap completely Standard value Within 2 mm Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the centring adj screen Centring adj screen If the m
116. 1 CNO7 6 pin CN503 CN10 4 pin 100 CN504 CN803 6 pin CN200 5 CN06 CN801 22 pin 12 pin 5 pin 22 pin Image control board CN11 80 pin CN37 8 pin CN12 22 pin CN10 100 pin CN13 24 pin 17 CN16 CN10 CN14 10 pin 24 pin 20 pin 68 pin 5 7 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS Printer drive board CN40 41 15 pin 11 pin CN36 CN150 10 pin 26 pin Scanner drive board CN11 80 pin DC power supply unit 1 CN380 6 pin 7 pin DC power supply unit 2 4 pin CN2 5 pin CN3 5 pin 5 8 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS Polygon motor drive board CN45 11 pin CN44 5 pin Paper feed detect board High voltage unit 1 High voltage unit 2 CN38 5 pin CN48 4 pin CN47 6 pin CN49 10 pin Operation board Parameter memory board CN213 CN217 CN210 14 pin 5 pin 13 pin CN2 20 pin 24 pin CN216 14 pin 5 9 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS Index sensor board L1 Inverter board CN9 CN28 CN29 5 pin 3 pin 4 pin Toner control sensor board Laser drive board CN64 12 pin 7 pin A D converter board OB inverter CN71 CN77 3 pin 4 pin 12 5 10 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 7045 TIMING CHART 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE MANUAL DENSITY TWO COPIES DB MI
117. 1 33 Unit isolation 34 If a unit is malfunctioning and causing a problem set the corresponding bit to isolate the unit from the system software isolation Copier operation can then continue without problem until the unit can be repaired etc SW2 sub switch turns ON with SW1 main switch Setting this bit to 1 will increase the warm up time Reason The CB control board houses both an engine control CPU and a system control CPU Switching ON of the main power does not start the engine CPU but does start the power supply to the system CPU The system CPU is initialized and then the OS is initialized and then memory and other hardware checks are performed This initialization sequence takes about 6 seconds until printer scanner and copy LEDs have gone ON OFF When this setting is 0 the engine does not start if SW2 is pressed during initialization 85 Search start tray setting for APS Mode 23 0 23 1 Search from main body upper tray 0 0 Search from main body upper tray 1 0 Search from DB upper tray 0 1 Prohibited 1 1 36 Process non stop and reserved job start timing setting E RHD memory Job Job Job Job Job 1 2 3 4 5 FN Printing in progress Reservation This machine can hold up to 5 print jobs in the E RDH memory When this setting is 1 and a reserved job copy reservation or printer job is generated during a
118. 1 Operation M4 is a 24 V drive DC motor which drives the drum toner conveyance screw toner recycle screw and separation claw swing section M4 is PLL controlled by feedback signal from a speed sensor installed inside M4 itself maintaining it at a constant speed M4 goes ON when the Start button is pressed and goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited 2 B 3 aS Signals Input signal LOCK SIG M4 to PRDB M4 rotational status detection signal This signal becomes L when M4 reaches the set speed Output signals CONT PRDB to M4 4 drive control signal L M4 ON H M4 OFF M4 CLK PRDB to M4 Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M4 READ SECTION 1 Composition READ SEGTION APS 1 sensor APS 2 sensor Exposure unit CCD unit Optics rail rear Optics driven sheet lower Optics driven sheet lower V mirror unit CCD unit Exposure unit Optics driven sheet Optics driven upper sheet upper V mirror unit 1st mirror 3rd mirror 2 Mechanisms Platen original Exposure unit Mechanisms Methods Original glass 1 Light source Xenon lamp Exposure Slit exposure Scanning 1 Platen original scanning 1st 2nd and 3rd mirror shift RADF original scanning Fixed light source Original moving Lamp power supply Lamp cor
119. 1 Main body tray SW101 102 3 85R 4 AS 7 A5R 8 9 84 10 B6R 11 2 DB upper 109103 Post card 13 B5 15 A4 3 DB middle only for DB 208 SW401 402 17 8 4X14 21 8 5X11R Paper size signal 16 22 5 5X8 5 23 5 5X8 5R 4 DBilower only for DB 208 403 404 24 11X17 31 8 5X11 5 By pass feed tray paper size PS27 No paper detection PS Paper feed door open close 17 PS14 Close Open detection signal 1 No feed PS PS17 p r 2 Registration PS PS16 Paper feed sensor signal 20 Paper feed 3 Paper feed detect DB paper PS401 No paper Door No Paper Door Conveyance feed door open close detect is closed is opened 1 Fixing exit PS PS29 Paper exit sensor signal 22 No paper P 2 Paper exit PS PS1 Ep P Interlock 23 1 Front door MS1 Close Open 1 Optics home position PS PS3 Not in home In home position position Optics Optics sensor signal 40 2 APS timing PS PS4 Open Close 3 APS sensor 1 525 No paper 4 APS sensor 2 526 47 ADJUSTMENT Classification Name Code Multi code Symbol ON Intrinsic function Toner level detection signal 57 TDL No toner Toner 1 No original detect PS 5305 No paper 2 RADF open close detect PS PS301 Close Open 3 Cover open close dete
120. 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 0 0 0 SW10 4 Magnification display switchover Auto 1 00 0 0 0 5 Setting screen message Guide display Machine status display 0 0 0 6 Icon display in third line of LCD message display No Yes Low toner PM etc 1 0 0 7 Displaying of JAM code No Yes 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 E 1 0 0 3 EN 1 0 0 SW11 4 pem nee 0 0 0 5 amp 1 0 0 6 Tray icon display LCD size selection area No Yes 1 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ET 0 0 0 2 ng 0 0 0 3 Setting of PM count at which copying is 20 0 0 0 12 4 inhibited 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 KRDS connection recognition Not recognize Recognize 0 0 0 7 F E screen switchover except for F34 F35 and F36 No Yes 0 0 0 26 1 8 25 ADJUSTMENT SW Default values No BIT Functions 0 1 Japan U S A Europe 0 0 0 0 1 mrs 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 Changing the non image area erase 27 1 1 1 7 threshold value 0 0 0 0 Operation when stapling is not possible Large size 28 0 1 0 1 Other than B5R 5 5 x 8 5R 0 1 0 2 Operation when stapling cannot be done small siz
121. 10 x 100ms OA 28 Timer 4 Line Connect Send 00 FFH 20H 32 x 100ms 20 Start up message request 29 Timer 5 Opposite Party 00 FFH 1EH 30 x 1sec 1E Signal answer wait time 30 Retry data Timer 6 00 FFH FFH 255 x 5ms FF Initialization OK Dial call 31 0 Call when SC error occurs 0 disable 99 Cali date enable 2 Call parts replace date 1 enable 3 Call drum replace date 0 disable 4 Call regular service date 0 disable 2 care 3 7 KRDS No MSB Bit pattern LSB Function Description byte bit 76543210 31 6 Call regular transmit date Jo disable enable 7 Select regular transmit time Time and count 32 o Callwhen optional configu 9 disable ration is changed 1 1 Report of toner Pe replenishment 2 Reportof JAM occur fol disable frequently 1 enable 3 7 Reserve Don t care 33 0 Set up flag Don t care D 1 finished 1 2 Radial interval 010 1 min BER 110 5 111 7 min 3 4 Reserve _______________ 5 6 Reserve Don t care 7 Line feed control o CRLF LF exist 27 when initializing modem 1 CR No LF 34 0 1 Call JAM date main body 0 0 Copy quantity level 1 Valid copy quantity E CR FO 0 1 Copy quantity level 2
122. 2 01014010 sa gt 0111i1010 7A 00011011 001111011 01014011 58 c 01111011 7B ooot 1100 1c lt oo11 100 oroo sc 1 Jonio 7c 0001 1101 00111101 01011101 50 1 0111101 70 1 1 1110 gt 001111110 3E 5E 1111110 7E 1 111 2 ooi 010141111 0111 1111 3 17 KRDS 7 Error Code Table Error code Contents Countermeasure 00 00 Connection NG Redial repeat reception standby 01 No response from other party Redial repeat reception standby No detection of start text from host after establishing connection K00 02 Because copying is taking place it is impossible to write to the Temporarily stop copying non volatile memory and the line is cut 03 Password does not match Check password 04 Serial number does not match Check serial number 00 05 Syntactical error Redial repeat reception standby 06 Write in indication on an item for which write in is impossible Re operation on host side 00 07 Unread item error Re operation on host side 08 Signal reception time out after detection other party response Redial repeat reception standby 00 09 Serial number registration completed Check serial number
123. 2 ADU regist PS PS502 No paper 83 ADU set detect PS ADUisreleased ADU is set 1 82 8 Output Check code List 47 ADJUSTMENT Inhabit to set change to Classification Name Code Multi code Symbol n write in the filed Exposure lamp 00 L1 Toner supply motor 1 01 M3 M11 Charging 02 HV1 X Transfer 03 HV2 X Separation AC 04 HV2 X High Tee Separation AC DC 05 ode soectfied value HV2 X voltage Separation DC 06 HV2 X image Grid 07 HV1 Adjust by the 36 mode Dmax y LED 08 Adjust by the 36 mode Guide plate 10 HV2 X Bias 11 HV2 X 1 Service counter clear correcting date 10 EKC data block clear Counter clear 15 11 Job memory data clear 12 Count of parts named clear 98 KRDS non volatile memory clear Dmax level auto adjustment 18 PWM Y correction 19 Adjust by the 36 mode 1 Main body tray SD2 Adjust by the 36 mode 2 By pass SD4 151 paper feed SD 20 3 DB upper SD401 4 DB middle 50402 5 DB lower 0403 1 Main body 210 mm sec 2 Main body 630 mm sec MB Tst Kaper feedimotor 21 3 DB low speed 210 mm sec 4 DB high speed 610mm sec M401 Paper feed 1 Main body tray M8 2 DB upper M402 53 3 DB middle M403 4 DB lower M404 Registration clutch 25 MC1 By pass tray paper size VR1 detect VR 28 X Separation c
124. 3 J 2 4 Replacing the By pass Separation R bb6r inepte 3 J 3 5 Replacing the By pass Double Feed Prevention Rubber 3 J 3 6 Replacing the Feed Rubber and Paper Feed Rubber 3 J 4 7 Removing and Reinstalling the Double Feed Prevention Roller 3 J 5 8 Removing and Reinstalling the 2nd Paper Feed Unit 3 J 5 9 Replacing the Registration Rollers upper lower 3 J 6 FIXING UNIT nu itt eicere 3 K 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Units unisont 3 K 1 2 Replacing the Fixing Heater Lamps 1 and 2 L2 and L3 3 K 1 3 Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Roller Fixing Roller A and Fixing Cleaning Pad 3 K 2 4 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Roller upper 3 K 3 5 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Claw upper 3 K 4 6 Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Exit Roller Unit lower 3 K 5 7 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Claw lower 3 K 5 8 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Roller lower 3 K 6 9 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Temperature Sensor 1 and 2 THY and 1H2 ten 3 K 7 10 Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat 5
125. 49 items 2 Count of parts Named 30 items 6 Password setting 1 Key operator password set 4 digits 2 E K C master key code set 8 digits 3 Weekly timer master key set 4 digits 7 Service TEL No Telephone amp Fax No of service center setting 8 Serial number Main body and option serial No display and destination setting 9 ROM version Displays the version numbers of the ROM that perform overall control image control operation panel control optics control and the also the version numbers of the ROM that control the RADF finisher and any other option that are installed 10 KRDS setting Calling time set Host password set KRDS TEL No Setting KRDS software SW set KRDS Setup calling A WD 11 ISW Rewrites the contents of the flash ROM of each board including boards used in options except for printer 12 Root counter Displays the root counter total counter 13 Setting date Sets the starting date of the total counter 1 5 ADJUSTMENT 1 Setting Method This machine has an adjustment mode called 25 Mode This mode enables rewriting of the non volatile storage and specify other various settings 1 Turn OFF the SW2 sub power when the SW1 main power remains ON Turn the SW2 sub power ON while pressing 2 and 5 of the numeric keys The 25 mode menu screen will appear In the 25 mode normal copy op
126. 5 x 11 or smaller or to ignore the APS detected size and copy as nonstandard size When both SW21 5 and SW 21 3 are set to 1 the setting of 21 5 has priority over the 21 3 SW7 4 Nonstandard size switch of platen APS 2 Selects whether to copy on A4 Japan Europe or 8 5 x 11 U S A when the APS detected the original as nonstandard size or to copy on the APS selected nonstandard size SW7 3 Nonstandard size switch for platen APS 1 Selects whether to copy on B6 Japan A5 Europe or 5 5x 11 U S A when the APS detected the original as nonstandard size or to copy on the APS selected nonstandard size When both SW7 4 and SW7 3 are set to 1 the setting of 7 4 has priority over the 7 3 19 Request password for 25 36 47 mode If this bit is set to 1 Yes the copier will display a password request screen before entering service mode The password is 9272 20 Disable of copying when PM count is reached SW12 3 12 4 and 12 5 Setting of PM count at which copying is disabled sets the number of copies at which copying is disabled Note that copying will be disabled only if SW8 2 Disable copying when PM count is reached is set to 1 Mode 12 3 12 4 12 5 1000 copies 0 0 0 2000 copies 1 0 0 3000 copies 0 1 0 4000 copies 1 1 0 5000 copies 0 0 1 21 Priority tray when APS is released This setting sets the tray se
127. 5BA4032 100 000 Tray 2 Double feed prevention rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 3 Separation rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 3 Paper feed rubber 25BA4032 100 000 Tray 3 Double feed prevention rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 4 Separation rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 4 Paper feed rubber 25BA4032 100 000 Tray 4 Double feed prevention rubber 54004056 100 000 By pass paper feed By pass Separation rubber 54004056 100 000 unit By pass Paper feed rubber 25BA4032 100 000 By pass Double feed prevention rubber 54004056 100 000 Fixing unit Fixing cleaning roller 55GA5312 100 000 Fixing roller A 55GA5311 100 000 Fixing cleaning pad 55GA5350 100 000 Fixing roller upper 55GA5303 200 000 Fixing claw upper 25SA5315 200 000 Heat insulating sleeve 45405339 200 000 Fixing roller lower 55GA5304 400 000 Fixing claw lower 54005310 400 000 Fixing bearing upper 55GA7502 400 000 Bearing 55GA7503 400 000 Fixing bearing lower 55GA7504 400 000 Fixing heater lamp 1 55HF8302 800 000 Fixing heater lamp 2 55HF8303 800 000 SERVICE Classification Parts name Part number Actual count Rear of main body Ozone filter 55YA7350 200 000 Fixing filter 55GA7337 200 000 DF 315 Paper feed roller 120A4582 90 000 Separation roller 120A4582 90 000 Double feed prevention pad 120A 458 90 000 Pick up clutch ass y 129H 474 450 000 Paper dust removal pad 129H 472 90 000 FS 109 Tray 2 Paper exit drive rol
128. 8 gt 2 8 2 28 8 5 2 9191515155555 8 5 F x lt 4 lt lt lt lt o o 5 r alel alr 2 SIX 2 51518 S E 9 9 oo a a 3 3 3 5 13 JAM ERROR CODES JAM CODE LIST JAM ERROR CODES Classifica Jam Operation when jam within certain period after it has been turned ON at the straight eject mode Causes Jam clearing method tion code 5 By pass 10 PS16 registration is not turned ON If a is being made Remove the original feed tray within a certain period after SD4 by when a jam occurs copy paper from by pass pass paper feed has been turned ON operation is stopped tray then remove the after completion of exit jammed paper 5 Tray 1 412 PS17 no feed is not turned ON within of the copy Open the main body certain period after 502 1st paper feed conveyance door and 8 has been turned ON remove the jammed paper and close it Open the tray and remove the jammed paper and close it DB upper J13 PS401 paper feed detect is not turned Open the DB convey tray ON within a certain period after SD401 ance door and remove paper feed upper has been turned the jammed paper and ON close it DB middle J14 PS401 paper feed detect is not turned Open the tray and tray or LCT ON with
129. 8 Original press SD SD302 1 84 47 ADJUSTMENT Inhabit to set change to Classification Name Code Multi code Symbol d write in the filed Vertical magnification data 61 setting 50 Vertical magnification data 62 setting 100 Vertical magnification data 63 setting 200 Adjust by the 36 mode RADF Vertical magnification data 64 Replace the input multi code setting 400 value with the setting value Registration data setting 65 face side Loop data setting forward feed 66 Loop data setting reverse feed 67 Registration data setting 68 back side 01 Drum position initialize 02 Drum operation only MED 03 Conveyance operation only M801 04 Rear side stapler M stapling M803 05 Front side stapler M stapling M802 06 Stapler movement M initialize 07 Stapler movement M move to mere size position A4 size position 08 Paper exit M operation M805 09 Rear side alignment M initialize 10 Rear side alignment M FNS Each load of FNS 70 move to alignment position M808 A4 size position 11 Rear side alignment M open close operation 12 Front side alignment M initialize 13 Front side alignment M move to alignment position M809 A4 size position 14 Front side alignment M open close operation 15 Tray move down 16 Tray move upward Mao 17 Gate switching ON Tray 1 OFF Tray 2 3 DRE 18 Tray 2 spinose roller operation M810 1
130. 8A or DB 608 is not installed the trays of the DB section is not displayed Reference2 Availability of paper size depends on the selected tray The unavailable paper sizes will be skipped and not displayed Reference3 New data on tray size will be written in non volatile RAM every time it is changed in this screen The following table shows the paper sizes that can be used in the LCT DB 608 Japan 4 MR B5 B5R 8 5 11 8 5 x Europe 4 B5 BSR 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 11R U S A 8 5 x 11 8 5 x A4 AR main body tray all trays in the DB 208 2084 the upper tray of the DB 608 and the by pass tray can not be adjusted in the Non volatile RAM These trays detect paper size via sensors Caution2 The size series of the universal tray can be selected as follows Destination setting AB series Inch series Caution3 The screen is automatically changed from the optional tray according to the type of trays 25 ADJUSTMENT 4 PM Count Setting 3 Setting of PM cycle This function resets the PM count and sets the PM cycle SEL PMC yeas DNS Care should be taken to reset the PM count properly Step Operation procedure PM count cycle menu Esme fo 2 25 mode menu screen E SONNE Press the 3 key 1 PM count reset 3 PM Co
131. 9 Tray 3 spinose roller operation M811 20 Shutter SD 50802 1 85 47 ADJUSTMENT Inhabit to set change to Classification Name Code Multi code Symbol write in the filed ADU paper feed moter 80 M501 1 210 mm sec forward rotation 2 630 mm sec forward rotation 3 350 mm sec reverse Reversal paper exit motor 81 rotation M12 4 630 mm sec reverse rotation ADU 5 210 mm sec reverse rotation 6 350 mm sec forward rotation 1 Restart MC MC501 2 Loop MC 210 mm sec ADU clutch 82 MC502 3 Loop 630 mm sec 4 ADU conveyance clutch MC503 Gate SD 83 SD5 PM counter clear 90 Drum counter 91 1 Drum counter clear Process initial setting 92 Field initial setting Reset to Others i 98 factory setting data Process delivery complet 96 ing setting Lighting adjustment 97 1 86 ADJUSTMENT OTHER OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 1 Centering Adjustment 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips standard Pyramid chart A3 2 Universal tray centering Set screws Front side guide Rear side guide Step Operation procedure 1 copy and measure the extent of paper centering 2 Slide ou
132. ADF scanning density adjustment When the original glass 1 is replaced adjusts the density when reading the original with the RADF Before preforming this adjustment be careful of the following items 1 The mechanical adjustment optical adjustment and electrically adjustment of the scanner were completed 2 Clean the original glass 1 3 The white chart is not dirty or folded Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 6 Image Quality adj key 3 Image quality adj screen Press the 2 RADF Scan density adj key 4 RADF Scan density adj screen Set the white chart on the RADF Note1 5 Press the key 6 Check that the Completed will appear in the message display area 7 If the Error will appear in the message display area then repeat steps 4 and 5 Note2 8 Press the key to return to the print density adjustment screen Note1 Be sure to set the white chart orientation to the orientation of A4 Note2 If ERROR is displayed repeatedly there is a possibility in the adjustment of the scanner machine optics electric related or parts defect 1 61 36 3 ADJUSTMENT Non original erasure installation survey Carry out a survey of the installation environment after the machine is newly installed or moved to a different location Be careful of the following points when performing this ad
133. ATTERY ZA 8 THIHMTUMTT CT 2999099997 anspent ue PTTTTTTTTTTLTTTTTTTTTT 8000000000000000000000 200 3 8 x5 999 9 lt unu m xo 0505 D dU g 228 M z x EE ret lp o 2222 2222222222222222 62 21252 20888 difigeiioo Hone FER FIT 52855 555505555555555555555062500600660 021 111 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 lt lt 455 lt lt lt lt 2224224222211221212412414244 2608 1 PES EE EE BE EEEE 25 58 835 4 lt lt lt gt xen lt lt lt gt 5 b m PORT nu c RE 43515126 565 cus CN500 CN1 Board to Board Connector 100pin eye e SETET EUDDEDERE FOR ISW Appendix 6 COOLING FAN 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 7 7 17 o t 228 5 oi zay 1 8 a 2 I Qv N 9 I s Ast 618
134. After replacement verify that dimensions correspond to specifications RL1 may not be disabled under any cir cumstances 2 Hardware protection The output voltages of TH1 and TH2 fixer temperature sensors are compared to a reference voltage in the comparator circuit If the voltage exceeds the threshold L2 L3 and RL1 are set to OFF in hardware NCAUTION Periodically checkthe roller contact area of TH2 and replace the sensor if any problem is detected Since the TH1 is non contact check the distance from the roller and installing orientation of the sensor when an abnor mality has occurred RL1 may not be disabled under any cir cumstances 3 TS thermostat protection If the fixer roller temperature exceeds the threshold TS goes OFF and directly cuts power to L2 and L3 NCAUTION TS may not be replaced by any other conductor Do not change the distance between the TS and roller SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE The caution labels are attached to the machine areas as shown below where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or serious injury A PRECAUCION 7 9 5 eo oe 7 meee pc 7 N ATTENTION ATTENZIONE 222 0 AVORSICHT A ER Z CAUTION DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge
135. Copy count display and count reset by parts to be replaced fixed Set the parts name of the fixed parts to be replaced fixed parts No and copy count display and count reset Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 5 Parts counter key 3 Parts counter set screen Press the 1 Count of parts Fixed key 4 Count of parts Fixed screen Press A keys to select the data 5 Press the Count reset key 6 Count of parts Fixed screen Press the YES key to clear the copy count Press the RETURN key then the copy count is not reset and returns to the parts counter set screen by parts to be replaced 1 24 List of parts to be replaced fixed gt No Unit Parts name 01 DC Cleaning blade 02 including electrode Charging wire 03 Charging control plate I 04 Cleaning mounting base I 05 Charging cleaning block C 06 Charging cleaning block D 07 Transfer and separation corona wire I 08 Photosensitive drum 09 Drum separation claw 10 Developing unit Developer 11 Tray 1 Main body Tray 1 Separation rubber 12 Tray 1 Paper feed rubber 13 Tray 1 Double feed prevention rubber 14 DB upper tray Tray 2 Separation rubber 15 Tray 2 Paper feed rubber 16 Tray 2 Doubl
136. DB to M501 M501 rotational speed control switching signal L High speed H Low speed M501 CLK PRDB to M501 M501 rotational speed control reference clock signal M501 DRIVE PRDB to M501 M501 drive control signal L M501 ON H M501 OFF OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL 1 Parts Through Which Current Flows When the Main Switch is Turned OFF SW1 LBR DCPS1 1 Operation Current flows through the following parts if the power cord is plugged into the power outlet regardless of whether or not SW1 main power is ON or OFF LBR leak breaker If an internal part short circuits causing a current of more than 20 A to flow the breaker goes OFF cutting off the power to the machine 2 N 1 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL 2 Parts That Operate When the Power Switch is Turned ON 24VCONT 1 2 PRDB EN CONT 1 Operation a Parts that operate when the SW1 main power is turned ON DCPS1 DC power supply 1 DCPS2 DC power supply 2 CB control board OB operation board PTC PTC heater KRDS PRMB parameter memory board 431 related option 2 N 2 When the SW1 is turned ON the AC supply voltage is applied to the DCPS1 As a result the DCPS1 supplies 28 VDC voltage to the DCPS2 and PTC DCPS2 supplies 12 VDC 12 VDC and 5 V
137. DC power supply voltages to the CB from the 28 VDC power supply The 5 VDC power supply voltage are supplied to the OB via the CB Parts that operate when the SW2 sub power is turned ON SCDB scanner drive board image control board PRDB printer drive board Options If SW2 is turned ON while SW1 main power is ON the drive signal from the DC DC converter is sent from the CB to the SCDB and 5 VDC and 12 VDC power supply voltages are generated inside the SCDB As a result all of the 5 VDC and 12 VDC power supply voltages are supplied to the ICB the 5 VDC and 12 VDC power supply voltages are supplied to the PRDB and the 5 VDC power supply voltage is supplied to the control board of each option Subsequently a control signal is sent from the PRDB to DCPS1 DC power supply 1 to generate the 24 VDC power supply The 24 VDC power supply generated inside DCPS1 is supplied to each drive board and option the initial operation performs Signals Output signals EN CONT CB to SCDB DC DC converter drive signal in SCDB L main power ON 24VDC CONT 1 2 PRDB to DCPS1 24VDC power generation signal L main power ON 2 N 3 OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL 3 Fan Control 24VDC PGND FAN DRIVE FAN LOCK PGND 24VDC PGND PGND FAN H L FM2 LOCK 5VDC SGND CONT M4 CLK FAN DRIVE LOCK SIG LOCK SIG 24V DRIVE PGND H L CONT LOCK SIG
138. DDLE TRAY PAPER FEED NO uonnq pes 5 a4nsodx3 UONDNS ___ _ _ __ _ ________________ OW Z N N 51062 d9 N pE TSL 751 suo 5226 Hung _ b rs 19d 19d 2 uonesedag ZAH P ___ Jejsuell 7 suom suzet 0025 nm Pus seig ZAH n 26 I I Z scie os 51022 gt mep uonesedas LOS fuese _________________________ OOTD a a HN 5 pre paads paa suos eee peel suozs uxa aded 154 Sd 6254 Ee 10 0w paa Jaded js 9 OW LOW 9154 Sd 2153 Sd 1 10754 E W as peej1eded zovas T T T T ee i loquiAs 088 5 9 P EE 5 11 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 7045 TIMING CHART ADF ORIGINAL 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE AES TWO COPIES TRAY1 PAPER
139. E sv 1NOO 4 1709 a 5 5 1NOO S 1700 m 5 N v 178 17 00 gt zv 1NOO 1 1709 1 8 1NOO 218 1 1 96 5 o v2V t 1700 5 i AS QN9 d a 9 0028 ge anos 99 2 QNo d 9 QN9 d 1 0 Ave ADU 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 4 7 1 41 915 Sd 530 REVERSAL DETECTION SENSOR 2 ge z 59 259 H 10 9IS Sd BEE gt 2 aud Zao 19 S zig 915 135 SOS 88 557 wi Ave 189 58 CD gt 5 9 c o 3602 01V Sd 1 10 aug 400 og INTER LOCK SW 120R8601 res 3 02 Sd 4001 1 19 CED c 6v sae 139 994 139 99d P 7527 21 AS Ave 98 gt E 7 JE 139 191294 m 2 Pope t 27 Y 8 gt CDE gt ak v z8 65 Gerd Y Cu Y 8v ino nav 00 Ave 18 58 Cis gt 33 7 7
140. FEED NO wong uis EEK Sd 198p ON 506544 uejuonons OW SWOLLE uis 4ojow ew SWIOSZE aping 9 M bom Suze supze Od 10d m ERAS GM EE Suet ZAH n Suoze EmA serq ZAH B 3 LAH e 5098 22 QS LOS suosz suosz Jojow 50521 40joui LW 7 Jojow Jeded suoziz Sd jedeq 18 Sd 6254 peeds ET i pee Jeded 15 us 7 OM LON PIIEA A Sd uoneysibey 91Sd SdPpesjoN 2154 Sd 10 54 15 206 8 9 2 0 095 oes 5 12 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS ADU TIMING CHART 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE THREE COPIES 2 2 E E E 8 5828 8 5 5 n E F S S o 2 8 a E ENE E 3
141. Host 2 Therefore it is necessary first to set the Host 2 telephone No and host password 3 13 1 Setting calling time setting mode This function sets designated date calling 1 Screen selection Select the 1 Calling mode 1 Setting designated date calling setting in the calling time set screen to display the calling mode 1 designated date calling Screen Press the RETURN key to exit the calling mode 1 designed date calling screen and return to the calling time set screen Entering method a Enter year month day and time using the numeric keys The cursor that indicates entering position will be appeared in the message indication area at line 2 Using the lt lt key and move the cursor to desired position If reenter the entered data press the Stop clear button to clear the entered data then enter the data again Enter year month day and time using the numeric keys then press the key Enter year month day and time as follows The year is entered by inputting 4 digit in the Christian era The month and day are entered by inputting 2 digit number Example 1 is entered as 01 The time is entered using 24 hour clock Example 1 00p m is entered as 13 The minute is entered by inputting 2 digit number Example 1 is entered as 01 Example at 1 00 p m of January 15 1998 to 1998 01 15 13 00 Press the key every time data for one item is
142. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer an on site evaluation must be carried out quickly and Konica Corporation must be notified 3 To determine the cause of the accident conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on site checks in accordance with instructions issued by Konica Corpo ration 4 For reports and measures concerning accidents con sult your superior and follow the regulations set in Standards forthe Control Program for Measures Against Electrical Equipment Accidents 5 Conclusion 1 Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration There fore safety can be maintained by the appropriate by the proper daily service work conducted by the customer engineer 2 When performing service each copier on the site must be tested for safety The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY INFORMATION IMPORTANT INFORMATION The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is man datory for products marketed in the United States This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radia
143. If the miscentering is more than standard value enter value from the numeric keys then press the key to store the adjustment value Input range 74 inward direction of the center line to 74 rear direction of the center line 1 step 0 04mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is within standard value 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the NEXT or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen 1 46 d RADFcentering adjustment Step Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the key Timing adj screen Press the 5 Centring adj key Centring adj screen Press the NEXT key until RADF appears in the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the start button to make a copy Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy Standard value Within 3 mm Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the centring adj screen Centring adj screen If the miscentering is more than standard value enter a value from the numeric keys then press the SET to store the adjustment value Input range 74 inward direction of the center line to 74 rear direction of t
144. Konica SERVIGE MANUAL MODEL 7045 MBER 2000 CSM 7045 KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC 7045 SERVICE MANUAL NOVEMBER 2000 IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this equipment as well as the risk of damage to the equipment Konica Business Technolo gies strongly recommends that all servicing be per formed by Konica trained service technicians only Changes may have been made to this equipment to improve its performance after this service manual was printed Accordingly Konica Business Technologies Inc makes no representations or warranties either expressed or implied that the information contained in this service manual is complete or accurate It is under stood that the user of this manual must assume all risks or personal injury and or damage to the equipment while servicing the equipment for which this service manual is intended Corporate Publications Department O 2000 BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES ING All rights reserved Printed in U S A CONTENTS m vi F RSTE vil vii LED AM viii xi xi 7045 SYSTEM CONFIGURATOR CONTENTS MAINBODY SECTION 1 OUTLINE OUTLINE OF SYSTEM 1 A 1 7045 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 A 2 CENTER CROSS SECTIONAL VIEW 1 A 4 DRIVE SYSTEM
145. L1 9 Set screw Exposure lamp LR Set screw notch 9 Remove the two set screws then remove the L1 in verter L1 INVB 10 Disconnect the connector CN29 from the L1 inverter 11 Remove the set screw holding the exposure lamp on the rear side then remove the exposure lamp Exposure lamp Cord clamp Set screws L1 inverter Connector CN29 12 Reinstall the exposure lamp in the opposite sequence to removal Caution Be sure to check the image after installing the exposure lamp For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service 3 04 4 Removing and Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Caution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Caution 1 Never pull the cord Caution 2 Check to ensure that you have not forgotten to insert a connector or install a screw and also that a cord is not crushed Caution 3 Use a optics position adjusting jig when installing the exposure unit Caution 4 Be sure to perform image quality adjustment after installing the exposure unit For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service Caution 5 When reinstalling the original stopper plate ensure that the film attached to the original glass 1 is on top of the glass stopper plate Caution 6 Before installing the original glass 1 be sure to clean it To prevent the image defect Removal procedure
146. Leading edge timing key Lead edge timing adj screen Press the COPY key Basic screen Set the new pyramid chart on the original glass and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the start button to make a test copy Measure the leading edge original erasure amount of the output paper Standard value Within 3 0 mm Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the lead edge timing adj screen Lead edge timing adj screen If the leading edge original erasure amount is not correct enter a value from the numeric keys then press the SET key to store the adjustment value Input range 20 small to 20 large 1 step 0 1mm Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the leading edge original erasure amount becomes the standard value 10 Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen 1 44 Centering adjustment Adjust the miscentering for paper feed direction Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the timing adjustment menu screen will appear Select the 5 Centering adj on this screen then the centering adjustment screen will appear This adjustment has the following kinds of items These can be selected by pressing the or te Centering adjustment All Centering adjustment Main body tray Centering adjustment DB upper Centering adjustment DB middle Centering adjustment DB lower when DB 2
147. N4 on the rear of the 2nd paper feed unit and relay connector CN86 Connector CN66 Connector CN3 Relay connector CN86 Connector 4 PAPER FEED UNIT 4 Remove the by pass paper feed unit from the main body Remove the drum unit from the main body Remove the two set screws then remove the 2nd paper feed unit oo 2nd paper feed unit Set screws b Reinstallation procedure 1 Insertthe 2nd paper feed unit into the inside of the main body 2 Install the 2nd paper feed unit so that the metal plate in the bottom of the 2nd paper feed unit gets under the receive section of the main body 7 Ea gt 2nd paper feed unit Lb Ei ET 11 ptes hip Receive section of the main body Metal plate in the bottom of the 2nd paper feed unit 3 The reminder of the installation procedure is in the opposite sequence to removal 9 Replacing the Registration Rollers upper lower Procedure Remove the 2nd paper feed unit Loosen the one set screw then remove the registration guide plate B Caution 1 Be careful not to fold PET sheet upper lower Caution 2 When installing the registration guide plate B make sure that PET sheets upper lower goes between the a
148. NEXT or key Restart timing adjustment All Restart timing adjustment Engine Main body tray Restart timing adjustment Engine DB upper Restart timing adjustment Engine DB middle Restart timing adjustment Engine DB lower when DB 208 is installed Restart timing adjustment Engine By pass Restart timing adjustment Engine ADU Restart timing adjustment RADF face side Restart timing adjustment RADF back side 1 41 36 ADJUSTMENT Engine restart timing adjustment Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 86 mode menu screen Press the key 3 Timing adj screen Press thel 2 Restart timing key 4 Restart timing adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired adjustment item appears in the message display area 5 Press the COPY key 6 Basic screen Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper and press the start button to print the SGU pattern 7 Check the restart timing of the output paper Standard value 2 0 mm 8 Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the restart timing adj screen 9 Restart timing adj screen If the restart timing is different from the standard value enter a value from the numeric keys then press the key to store the adjustment value Input range 127 slower to 127 faster 1 step 0 1mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing becomes the
149. On site Service Konica copiers are extensively tested before shipping to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met in order to protect the customer and customer engineer from the risk of injury However in daily use any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure In order to maintain safety and reliability the customer engineer must perform regular safety checks viii 1 Advance Preparation for Safety Checks N CAUTION 1 Wear clothing that facilitates work and is designed for safety Carry out all procedures carefully to prevent injury Be sure to disconnect the power cord of the copier and all optional equipment from the AC outlet Simply turning off the power switch is not sufficient because paper feed units or other electrical equip ment may be powered also when the power switch is turned off Proceed with special care when performing opera tion checks or adjustment while the unit is powered When carrying out operation checks or adjustment while external covers are removed the risk of elec trical shock exists when touching parts which carry high voltage or electrical charge The risk of injury exists when touching moving parts such as gears or chains 2 3 4 2 Safety Checkpoints The following list is not exhaustive but it includes actions which must be carried out at every on site service N CAUTION 1 Check external covers and the frame for sharp edges b
150. PSW 12 6 KRDS OE connection recognition to 1 TEL LINE 3 Initialize KRDS memory 47 mode to 1 P 98 P Modem 1T to Start button ON Wall jack 4 Set KRDS software SW 25 mode to 10 KRDS setting to 4 KRDS software SW set KRDS sofware SW set ore Select type of modem and dial mode Select the type of modem from the bit pattern 0 Modular cable to 6 of the KRDS software SW No 1 and dial mode from the bit pattern 7 5 Host password setting 25 mode to 10 KRDS setting to 2 Host password set Refer to 1 and 2 6 KRDS phone number setting 25 mode to 10 KRDS setting to 3 KRDS TEL No setting Refer to 3 7 Turn off the SW1 main power and SW2 sub power of the copier 8 Turn on the power switch of the modem 9 Turn on the SW1 main power of the copier 10 Checkthe set up flag setting condition 25 mode to to 4 KRDS software SW set to check that the data on the switch No 33 and bit 0 indicates 0 not yet 11 Check the KRDS communication mode 25 mode to to 4 KRDS software SW set to Check the data in bit No 2 of switch No 38 It should be set on 0 if communications are via a modem If the setting is different change the setting 12 Preform KRDS set up calling 25 mode to to 5 KRDS Setup calling 13 Press the Start key to start set up 14 Check the finishing of set up 25 mode to to 4 KRDS software SW set to Completes if the data on
151. Parts Kit Composition 4 10 SERVICE MATERIALS 4 12 SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 4 13 vi 5 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 7045 ELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING 5 1 7045 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING 5 4 7045 TIMING CHART 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE MANUAL DENSITY TWO COPIES DB MIDDLE TRAY PAPER FEED 5 11 7045 TIMING CHART ADF ORIGINAL 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE AES TWO COPIES TRAY 1 PAPER FEED die entente 5 12 ADU TIMING CHART 8 5X11 LIFE SIZE THREE COPIES etie 5 13 JAM ERROR CODES JAM CODE Hete 6 1 ERROR CODE LIST er 6 5 APPENDIX 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 1 4 Appendix 1 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 2 4 Appendix 2 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 3 4 Appendix 3 7045 OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM 4 4 Appendix 4 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to the copier Konica Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Konica trained service technicians Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Handbook was printed Accordingly Konica Corporation make
152. Required 943102 HEGE loc 10 10 00 Konica 7045 MAINBODY SECTION OUTLINE OUTLINE OF SYSTEM OUTLINE OF SYSTEM Top CB Control board Expansion memory unit MU 403 404 405 Back Printer controller IP 431 Hard disk Network board HD 103 303 Finisher FS 109 Key counter PostScript Expansion memory PS 342 unit for printer MU 403 404 PFU 3 trays PFU 1 tray PFU 1 tray LCT DB 208 DB 208A DB 608 1 1 7045 PRODUGT SPEGIFICATIONS 7045 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Continuous copy speed life size copies min 1 Type Type Copying method Semi console type Indirect electrostatic method Original table method Fixed Photosensitive material Sensitizing method Paper feed trays Functions Originals Original size Copy sizes OPC Laser writing One stacked tray 500 sheets 21 Ib Multisheet by pass tray 100 sheets 21 Ib PFU 500 sheets tray 21 Ib 1 tray or 3 trays 1 1500 sheets 21 Ib 1 1 Option Sheets book solid object max 11x 17 8 5 x 14 8 5x11 5 5x8 5 ADU usable paper size Magnification 11 17 8 5 x 14 8 5 x 11 8 5 x Fixed magnifications Special ratio x0 50 x0 65 x0 77 x1 00 x1 29 x1 55 x2 00 Three kinds
153. S Fixing temperature sensor 2 ADU loop MC M501 ADU paper feed motor MC503 ADU feed MC PS14 Open close detection PS PS13 No feed PS by pass SD4 By pass SD PS27 Paper size detection PS by pass VRI Paper size detection VR by pass 5 3 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 7045 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING 84 BK 3 PIN 100 BK 8 PIN 100A BK 7 PIN 82 W 6 PIN 85 BK PIN 86 BK 2 PIN 152 BK 24 PIN 204 W 11 PIN 399 W 2 PIN 398 W 2 PIN 97 W 3 PIN 98 BK 4 PIN 59 W 6 PIN 56 W 2 PIN 300 GY 16 PIN 205 W 2 PIN ES 203 BK 25 PIN 290 ifn 509 BK 2 PIN 83 BK 8 PIN II 0 46 67 BK 2 PIN 141 W 2 PIN 140 W 6 PIN 58 BK 4 PIN 400 GY 16 PIN 145 W 3 PIN 142 W 3 PIN 156 BK 3 PIN 390 B 16 PIN 92 W 6 PIN gt gt gt r EF 7 202 36 PIN pp 79 VS BK 9 PIN 395 BK 2 PIN 5 4 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 152 BK 24 PIN 166 BK 2 PIN 160 W 12 PIN 2 a N m oo 167 BK 2 PIN BK 2 PIN BK 2 PIN W 13 214 5 5 DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS 79 BK 9 PIN 81 BK 5 PIN 60 BK 20 PIN DIAGRAMS TIMING CHARTS Control Board 500 505 100 1
154. SA 4 1 1 1 5 0 0 0 6 1 1 1 7 0 0 0 0 Unit isolation 1 33 0 0 0 1 1 main body 1 main body 0 0 0 be used is isolated 2 0 0 0 SW18 3 0 0 0 4 Tray 2 DB upper be used 2 DB upper is isolated 0 0 0 5 Tray 3 DB middle used Tray 3 DB middle is isolated 0 0 0 6 Tray 4 DB lower can be used Tray 4 DB lower is isolated 0 0 0 7 DB be used DB is isolated 0 0 0 1 9 25 ADJUSTMENT SW im Default values No Japan U S A Europe 0 Unit isolation 2 33 Printer board can be used Printer board is isolated 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 gt 0 0 0 SW19 3 0 0 0 4 ADU be used ADU is isolated 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 RADF can be used RADF is isolated 0 0 0 0 Unit isolation 3 33 0 0 0 1 Sm 0 0 0 2 FNS tray 2 3 can be used FNS tray 2 3 is isolated 0 0 0 SW20 3 EL 0 0 0 4 Staple can be used Staple is isolated 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 gt gt 0 0 0 0 Platen size recognition selector switch 1 for 8 5 x 11 Letter A4 0 0 0 Latin America U S A only 1 Platen size recognition selector switch 2 for 8 5 x 11R 0 0 0 Latin America U S A only 2 Platen size recognition selector sw
155. Unit caution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Procedure Remove the side cover left and rear cover of the main body Refa to Exterval section Open the paper exit cover upper Remove the two set screws for the stay of the reversal and paper exit unit then slowly open the paper exit cover lower Paper exit cover lower Paper exit cover upper 8 L 1 4 While holding the reversal and paper exit unit remove the six set screws then remove the reversal and paper exit unit Set screw Set screws S Reinstall the reversal and paper exit unit in the opposite sequence to removal ADU SECTION 1 Removing and Reinstalling the ADU NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet a Procedure 1 Pulloutthe ADU then remove the four set screws two screws for right left respectively 2 Lift up the ADU then remove it Set screws Set screws 3 Reinstall the ADU in the opposite sequence to removal 3 M 1 ADU SECTION Konica 7045 SERVIGE SECTION ADJUSTMENT HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION 1 Construction This section details adjusting items and procedures Use this section for making adjustments and as checklist before implementing corrective measures in the field 1 Does the power supply meet the requirements 2 1 the power supply pr
156. a curve will appear in the message display area 7 To end the adjustment press the RETURN key Note3 Read No 51 darker after No 50 lighter reading Be careful of the reading order Note4 Set direction of SGU pattern 1 58 Original stopper plate rear Original stopper plate SGU pattern View from the rear of the original Place the original so that its print side points downward as usual 1 Be sure to place the SGU test pattern with the light density side against the original stopper plate on the platen Be sure to close the Note5 COPY key can not be pressed on this Screen d Gamma curve preparation Step Operation procedure 1 After c gamma correction last adjustment item is completed correctly then press the NEXT or BACK key until PWM gamma Patch Gamma curve will appear in the message display area 2 Press the START key Scanner reads the test pattern No 50 3 When the gamma curve is prepared Completed will appear in the message display area Perform a to d again when an error is displayed When the normal completion can not be made even if it is repeated several times clean or replace the related parts 4 Press the RETURN key to return to the image quality adj menu screen 36 ADJUSTMENT Error Code Table for PWM Gamma Co
157. all the fixing heater lamp with the manufacture mark facing the drive gear side Caution 2 Avoid touching the inside of roller with the fixing heater lamp Caution 3 Install the fixing heater lamp so that small rated power consumption is in the paper exit side and large is paper feed side Caution 4 Becareful of the installation orientation of the faston terminal at the rear side Procedure Remove the fixing unit from the main body Remove the two set screws then remove the fixing cover front Fixing cover front lt em Set screws FIXING UNIT 3 Disconnect the faston terminal at the front side of each fixing heater lamp 4 Remove the two set screws then remove the heater mount plate front Faston terminals Heater mount plate front Set screws 5 Freethe two wires from the cord clamp atthe rear of the fixing heater lamp 6 Disconnect the faston terminal at the rear side of each fixing heater lamp 7 Stretch the wire of the faston terminal at the rear side and pull out each fixing heater lamp towards you Fixing heater lamps Cord clamp Faston terminals 8 Reinstall the fixing heater lamps in the opposite se quence to removal 3 K 2 3 Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Roller Fixing Roller A and Fixing Cleaning Pad Caution When installing the oil supply unit hit it downward to fix it with the set screws Procedure
158. amp FEOQOV1X050 1 AT amp FEOQOV1X0S0 1 amp S0 N5 o o o ol o o o o o o ol o o o o o o ol o o o o o o ol o o o 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 If telephone line type is gt Bit No intialization command AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp 508 amp D2 amp C1 1 0 0 0 0 0 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp 50 E0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 83 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp 508 amp D2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 184 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp S0 amp M5 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 85 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 1100010 1 0 86 AT amp FEOQOV1X0S0 1 amp S0 N5 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 87 Example If the initialization command for the modem you are using is AT amp FEOQOV1X0S0 1 amp S0 and you have pulse dial telephone line enter the data for bits 7 to 0 as 00000001 In hexadecimal lt gt the value is expressed as 01 Be sure to verify with the above charts whether or not the hexadecimal lt gt output corresponds with the model being used Reference This machine has a telephone modem line type automatic recognition setting function KRDS Software SW Switch No 38 and bit No 0 Data 0 off manual setting 1 on line type automatic recognition default As a result if this switch is at 1 Bit No 7 of Switch No 1 can be either 0 or 1 KRDS 2 List of KRDS Software SW LLL Default value No byte bit Function
159. amp S0 Keep ON amp S1 ON during online ojo 452 81 KRDS No MSB Bit pattern LSB 2 Default value byte bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mas ae Hexadecimal 3 6 Check DSR signal 0 off 57 7 CheckDCDsign Lol 1 on 4 0 1 Set DTR signal operation 0 0 No setting 10 0 1 amp 00 110 amp 01 1 1 amp D2 2 3 Speaker control L p jojo jNoseig 011 Keep off 110 M1 ON until communication starts 111 2 4 6 Display speed when No setting connection is completed and dial busy tone is 01110 X1 Indication of communication speed detected 0111 X2 Indication of communication speed Detect dial tone 11010 Indication of communication speed Detect busy tone 11011 Indication of communication speed Detect dial and busy tone 11110 11111 7 Reset modem This isset 0 J o prior to shipping 1 amp F This is set prior to shipping 5 0 7 Arbitrary command regist 00 6 0 7 ration area 1 ASCII data 7 0 7 8 0 7 Arbitrary command regist 9 0 7 ration area 2 ASCII data 10 0 7 Send ASCII data specified in this area to modem 11 0 7 Arbitrary command regist 12 0 7 ration area 3 ASCII data 13
160. and 5 until black spots no longer appear on the copy Press the RETURN to return to running mode screen Press the RETURN key to return to 36 mode menu screen Note The developing sleeve and drum rotation period can be set to either 2 minutes or 4 minutes using 25 mode SW22 5 36 ADJUSTMENT 5 Test Pattern Output Print out the various internal test pattern Select the 4 Test pattern in the 36 mode menu screen then the test pattern output screen will appear Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 4 Test pattern key Test pattern screen Enter pattern number to be output from numeric key and pass the key Press the COPY Basic screen Press the start button to output a test pattern Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the test pattern output screen 7 To output a different test pattern repeat steps 3106 8 Press the RETURN key to return to 36 mode menu screen 1 49 36 ADJUSTMENT No 1 Overall halftone Check Items When the density is set to 70 halftone If white stripes black stripes or uneven density can be seen locate abnormality in either scanner system or printer system When the density is set to O white If the test pattern is fogged locate abnormality in either scanner system
161. ange the other settings After the main body is restarted the new settings will be activated 1 36 2 High Voltage Adjustment 1 Charging voltage value adjustment Charging voltage value adjustment is inhibited in the field 2 Transfer current adjustment Transfer current adjustment is inhibited in the field 3 Separation AC voltage adjustment Separation AC voltage adjustment is inhibited in the field 4 Separation DC voltage value adjustment Separation DC voltage value adjustment is inhibited in the field 5 Charging grid voltage adjustment Perform this adjustment when the drum charging control plate high voltage unit 1 or parameter memory board is replaced Refer to the LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS since there is a prioritization in the adjustment order Step Operation procedure 1 Connect the tester as shown in illustration at right Charging back plate GND earth Range 1000 VDC or auto range 2 Fitthedoorswitch jig to the interlock switch MS1 for the front door then enter the 36 mode 3 36 mode menu screen Press the 1 HV adjustment key 4 HV adjustment screen Press the NEXT key until HV adj Grid voltage appeas in the message display area 5 HV adj Grid voltage screen Press the Start button and check the tester value After checking press the stop clear button 6 If the measurement value is different from the standard val
162. aring If 1 shot display is enabled If the copy limit is exceed during staple mode operation a message indicating this appears on the display and copying continues in sort mode Note that this setting is related to the 1 5 DIS PLAY TIME setting available under key operator mode For information about memory switches refer to the Instruction Manual F34 F35 F36 latch In the event of a fixing related error the setting changes to 1 so that power OFF ON will not clear the error condition After correcting repairing the problem reset this to 0 to re enable copying Return to EKC screen after copying reservation If EKC setup is enabled then if this bit is set to 1 return to screen the copier will immediately display the EKC password request screen following exit of the final sheet for the reserved jobs If copying is not reserved the copier will wait 1 minute following job completion before displaying the EKC password request screen By pass feed nonstandard size selection This setting determines whether the system detects the size of the paper in the by pass tray If the setting is 1 handle as nonstandard size the size is not detected and copying is based on the maximum paper size 25 ADJUSTMENT 9 Non display of advance delete keys for job list Under default conditions the job list screen allows for deletion or priority changing of jobs that have been stored in E RDH memory If
163. ase mode in auto layout mode of copies in rotation of copies from tray SES win Blas 58 RESA o Nun of staele 2 in FNS No Of copies in Non standard original mode Num Of copies in flip side 2 mode 8 S I Overall control ROM version 1 74 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 8 Description Items Adjusting values 36 mode Default values and setting values of the HV adjustment drum clock adjustment restart timing adjustment paper loop adjustment lead edge timing adjustment centering adjustment and read point adjustment Adjustment list Page1 Management list HV Adjustment Drum clock adjustment Restart timing adjustment Paper loop adjustment Lead edge timing adjustment Centering adjustment 1 Read point adjustment Number of page Managenent list P 8 05 09 2000 10 148 ES 0000 1021986 ROM Ver AE Adjust 36 HY adjustment Item Charge Transfer Separation AC Separation DC Charge grid voltage Bias of development 0 Sleave rotation L detection adjust Drum clock adi Item Printer anner R DE 502 RAD 2002 Restart timing 008 008 Engine Bypass Engine Lower 005 Engine 082 006 Engine ADU 000 RADF sidel 005 Paper loop adi Item Bypass normal Bypass Thick paper Lower small Lower lar amp e DB ADU ADU small ADU
164. ass paper feed SD Paper size detection universal tray Tray detection switch tact switch By pass tray size detection Paper size detection PS Paper size detection VR 2 J 2 PAPER FEED UNIT 3 Paper Feed Control 5VDC SGND CONT M1 CLK LOCK SIG onwel e SD4 MC1 DRIVE SGND 5VDC SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC PS16 517 SIG 517 24VDC Ed SD2 DRIVE SD2 DRIVE 24VDC PFDB The 151 paper feed takes place as result of the transmission of drive force from 6 151 paper feed via SD2 1st paper feed and SD4 by pass to the respective paper feed roller and separation roller At this time each paper feed roller is not contact with the paper hence the paper feed roller and the by pass plate are moved up and down by 502 and SD4 causing each roller to contact with the paper Control of each roller is carried out by PRDB printer drive board The 2nd paper feed is carried out by registration Related signals are PS3 optics HP PS14 open close detection PS16 registration and PS17 no feed 2 J 3 PAPER FEED UNIT Operation 151 paper feed operation timing by pass 151 copy start After the specified time from when the Start button is pressed 2nd copy start After the specified time from when SD4 by pass goes ON for the 1st co
165. at the paper exit is completed Operation procedure 04 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 1 Enter the 25 Mode m 2 25 mode menu screen 05 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Preseihg key 06 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 3 Parts counter set screen 07 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Press the 2 Count of parts Named key 08 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 4 Count of parts Named screen 09 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Press the Jor key to select data to be 10 When copy count at the paper exit is completed set or changed 11 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 5 The following items can be set below 12 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Count reset To clear the copy count 13 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Limit set To enter the limit value 6 digit 14 When copy count at the paper exit is completed PIN set To enter the parts number 9 digit 15 When copy count at the paper exit is completed Parts name To enter ihe parts name 16 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 6 Press the RETURN or OK key then return to 17 When copy count at the paper exit is completed parts counter set screen by parts to be replaced 7 18 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 19 When copy count at the paper exit is completed
166. at this sleeve speed until Dmax correction takes place next Implementation timing a When the power is switched ON b At 500 copies At 1000 copies 2 G 6 2 Signals a Input signals 1 SIG 1 TCSB to PRDB This signal monitors the light reflected from the surface of the drum without toner and corrects the voltage applied to the PD1 so that the output becomes 6 V calibration Reference voltage 6 V SIG 2 TCSB to PRDB Output voltage of the PD1 on the TCSB Reference voltage 1 5 V Implementation timing Calibration takes place before Dmax correction DRUM TH TCSB to PRDB Drum surface temperature detection analog signal Output signals IF PRDB to TCSB Dmax value detection LED ON OFF control signal L LED ON H LED OFF DEVELOPING UNIT 7 Gradation Correction Control 5VDC SGND CONT M4 CLK LOCK SIG DRUM TH 5VDC DRUM TH 12VDC IF SIG1 SIG2 SGND TCSB alol o 24VDC A A B B 24VDC SGND L1 CONT OPT HOME PS3 5VDC PGND LAMP ON OFF L1 INVB 24VDC CCD ADB HV Gradation correction control is intended to stabilize the reproduction density of halftone for each machine 1 Operation Gradation density control is an operation in which the gradation characteristics of the developing toner density with respect to the exposure in the image forming section the drum and peripheral units are detected then
167. be firmly caught in the claw spring Procedure Remove the fixing unit from the main body Remove the paper exit roller unit lower Remove the four separation springs lower from the fixing claws lower Remove the one set screw each then remove the four paper exit auxiliary plates Remove the four fixing claws lower 6 Set screw Fixing claw p dd 4 4 lower Paper exit auxiliary plate Separation spring lower Reinstall the fixing claw lower in the opposite se quence to removal FIXING UNIT 8 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Roller lower Procedure Remove the fixing unit from the main body Remove the fixing roller upper from the fixing unit Remove the two set screws with step then remove the fixing entrance plate lower Fixing entrance plate lower Set screws with step Remove the two set screws then remove the guide unit Remove the two set screws then remove the fixing entrance plate upper Fixing entrance plate upper Set screws Set screws Guide unit 3 K 6 Remove the paper exit roller unit lower Remove the fixing roller lower from the fixing unit Remove the one set screw then remove the fixing knob from the fixing roller lower Remove the two C rings front and rear then remove the bearings front rear from the fixing roller lower 95 Set screw Fixin
168. can front half Platen APS read position Reference point 4 Booklet mode Output 1 to N When manual density has been selected Shading correction read position PS3 Exposure scan rear half Exposure scan front half Platen APS read position 1 Reference point READ SEGTION 2 Signals 4 Exposure Control a Input signal 1 OPT HOME PS3 to SCDB to ICB Exposure unit home position detection signal L Exposure unit is in the home position H Exposure unit is not in the home position PGND LAMP ON OFF b Output signal 2AVDC 1 B B SCDB to M2 M2 scanner ON OFF drive signal PN L1 INVB L1 CONT Power is supplied to L1 exposure lamp from the L1 INVB L1 inverter and is controlled by the ICB image control board via the SCDB scanner drive board 1 Operation L1 is a xenon lamp which is driven by an inverter circuit A xenon lamp provides a stable light intensity and also generates relatively little heat hence it does not require a light intensity control circuit that is used in conventional copying machines and also protective control that is normally required due to heat generation from the lamp is no longer used Signals Output signal 1 LAMP ON OFF ICB to SCDB to L1 INVB L1 ON OFF control signal L
169. cation of the output Standard value 0 5 or less Life size within 1 0 mm respect to 200 mm Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the drum clock adj screen Drum clock adj screen If the vertical magnification does not comply with the standard value enter the value from the numeric keys then press the key to validate your entry Input range 20 reduce the magnification to 20 increase the magnification 1 step 0 1 10 Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification meets the standard value 11 You can proceed to adjustment of another item using the NEXT and BACK keys 12 Press the RETURN to return to the RADF adj screen Standard value 0 5 or less Life size within 1 0 mm respect to 200 mm a Vertical magnification 190 1 65 36 ADJUSTMENT Adjustment of restart timing Use the following procedure to adjust the RADF restart timing At the 36 mode menu screen select 8 RADF adj to open the RADF adjustment menu At the RADF adjustment menu select 2 Restart timing This moves you to the screen you use to adjust the restart timing You can use the NEXT and BACK buttons to select the following adjustments RADF face side RADF back side Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press
170. ck paper copy mode 56 57 Page insertion mode 58 Chapter division mode 59 2in1 4in 1 8 in 1 mode 60 Repeat mode 61 B W reverse mode 62 Non image area erase mode 63 Increase contrast mode 64 Original auto layout copy 65 Face up output copy 66 Alternating output copy 67 68 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 1 69 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 2 70 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 3 71 Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 4 72 73 FNS Number of stapling front 74 FNS Number of stapling rear 75 quantity of booklet copy mode 76 77 Z fold mode copying count 78 quantity in the non standard size mode 79 Stamping mode copying count 80 Image head correction mode copying count 81 Overlay mode copy quantity Maximum count 99 999 999 1 22 4 Data collection 4 Count number of SC occurrence F Code Error code decimal number No Classification Main code Sub code 01 F10 1 Communication 02 F10 2 abnormality 03 F10 3 04 Paper feed 05 F18 2 abnormality 06 F18 3 07 F18 4 08 F18 5 09 F26 1 High voltage power 10 F28 1 source abnormality 11 F28 2 12 F28 3 13 F34 1 Fixing high temperature 14 F34 2 abnormality F34 3 4 1 Fixing low temperature 2 abnormality 1 Fixing sensor abnormalit
171. collection screen The data is displayed at the line 2 in the message display area as Data number No Count value 00000000 The data number be changed by pressing the or key Press and hold the key to display the next items continuously In order to confirm collected data 2 to 4 set SW 8 7 to 1 beforehand Refer to software switch setting 8 7 and 22 25 ADJUSTMENT 2 Collecting data details 2 Collecting data 2 1 Collecting data 1 lt Jam occurrence count by factor gt Size Paper size for destination No Jam Point Type No Japan Europe U S A 01 10 0 By pass 01 A3 A3 11x17 02 5 02 B4 B4 8 5x 14 03 12 0 Main body lower tray main body 03 4 A4 8 5x 11 04 13 0 DB upper tray 8 5 x 05 14 0 DB middle tray 04 5 B5R B5 B5R 5 5x8 5 06 15 0 DB lower tray Kad 05 5 5 3 07 16 0 Paper feed jam 06 B6 F4 08 i 07 8 5 14 5 09 2 Abe AAR 11 30 0 Conveyance jam 09 AB series AB series Inch series 12 31 0 Conveyance jam Special Special Special 13 10 Postcard 14 2 11 ADF mode original feed counter 15 32 0 Fixing unit conveyance jam 12 RADF mode original feed counter 18 330 KUNG unitconveyance jam pe 17 34 1 Rev
172. control plate 55GA2507 Charging wire 55FA2501 lA A KS JH KH EY gt DO Charging corona unit cleaning Back plate and its around and PCL Drum cleaner Waste rag Blower brush 7 Cleaner mount assembly 55GA 252 8 Charging wire cleaning block C 55GA 253 9 Charging wire cleaning block D 55GA 255 10 Developing unit removing 11 Drum removing 12 Drum cartridge Developing unit bot tom plate Toner control sensor Sepa rating claw Developing bias intercept Clean with each Blower brush Cleaning pad Drum cleaner Drum cleaner only whenusingthe toner con trol sensor cleaning Cleaning blade 55GA5601 Charging corona unit installing Developing unit k 13 14 Drum installing 15 1 Developing unit lower rib inside amp outside upper cover back side of the urethane sheet Waste rag Blower brush When cleaning the back side of the urethane sheet the back side should be cleaned particularly the urethane sheet section Developing unit installation Toner supply opening and its around Waste rag Write unit Cleanig pad Dust proof glass Cleanig pad Transfer Separation corona unit Mirror Transfer Separation corona unit cleaning Front and rear block Guide rail Separating bridge Entrance guide
173. ct MS MS301 4 Original regist PS 5306 RADF input 60 5 Original feed detect PS 5308 6 Original reversal detect PS PS309 Papel 7 Original exit detect PS PS307 8 Original size detect PS 1 5302 9 Original size detect PS 2 5303 10 Original size detect VR301 1 Drum position detect PS PS801 OFF ON 2 Drum entrance PS 5802 3 Tray 1 paper exit PS 5803 No paper 4 Paper through PS 5804 5 Tray upper limit PS 5805 Upper limit User di not reached 6 Tray lower limit PS PS806 Lower limit A Lower limit not reached 7 Tray 2 full stack detect PS PS807 Full stack Full stack not reached 8 Tray 3 full stack detect PS PS809 Full stack Full stack not reached 9 Stapler no paper PS PS812 Paper No paper 10 Paper exit motor HP PS PS813 e NSU e 11 Stapler unit HP PS PS814 Not in home In home 12 Alignment motor front HP PS PS816 position position 13 Alignment motor rear HP PS PS815 14 Stapler HP front PS PS817 In home Not in home position position 15 No stapler front PS PS818 16 Staple leading edge PS819 Staple No staple PS front 17 Stapler HP rear PS PS820 In home Not in home position position 18 No staple rear PS PS821 19 Staple leading edge PS Staple No staple rear 20 Inter lock MS MS801 Set ON FNS is released OFF 21 Stapler safety MS MS804 OFF ON 80 Reversal detect PS1 PS28 No paper Paper 81 Reversal detect PS2 PS30 Paper No paper ADU Reversal 8
174. d ADU paper feed M501 ADU paer feed Fan F52 1 Locking abnormality in the FM3 PRDB printer drive board abnormality main body cooling FM3 main body cooling F52 2 Locking abnormality in the FM4 PRDB printer drive board conveyance suction FM4 conveyance suction F52 3 Locking abnormality in the M5 PRDB printer drive board polygon FM5 polygon F52 4 Locking abnormality in the FM2 ICB Image control board scanner cooling SCDB scanner drive board FM2 scanner cooling F52 5 IP 431 cooling fan locking IP 431cooling fan abnormality printer kit F52 6 IP 431 CPU cooling fan locking IP 431 CPU fan abnormality 6 7 JAM ERROR CODES RADF abnormality other than F67 1 to 3 Classifica Warn Operation in case of Causes Estimated abnormal parts tion ing code warning occurrence Image E56 01 When the SW2 sub power is The machine stops immedi CB control borad processing turned ON the answer from the ICB ately ICB image control board communi Image control board is not replied PRDB printer drive board cation to the CB control board within 10 SCDB scanner drive board abnormality seconds E56 02 The CB control board is not detected the process ready signal 60 seconds or more during idling 56 03 CB control board is not detected the scanner ready signal 60 seconds
175. d 4 Paper exit roller 556 4805 Drum cleaner Cleaning 5 Photo sensors 25 8552 Blower brush Reading 1 Original glass 55YA6150 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad section 2 Lens 556 6001 6 Blower brush 3 1st mirror 55GA6106 6 Blower brush Cleaning pad 4 2nd mirror 556 6115 Blower brush Cleaning pad 5 Original glass 1 55GA6139 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 6 Optics drive wire front e 7 Optics drive wire rear e 8 Optics driven sheet 25BA6189 Multi oil Cotton tips 9 Optics driven sheet upper Multi Cotton tips 55GA6132 10 APS sensors 25SA8552 Blower brush 11 Photo sensors 55208551 Blower brush 12 Lamp power supply relay cord 55YA9012 4 3 SERVICE Implementation classification Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace ing Check ient Supply Tools used 14 Fixing unit 1 Fixing cleaning roller 55 5312 2 Fixing roller 55GA5311 3 Fixing cleaning pad 55GA5350 4 Fixing roller upper 55GA5303 Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 5 Paper exit guide lower removing 6 Fixing roller lower 55GA5304 Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 7 Fixing claw upper 25SA5315 8 Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 8 Fixing claw lower 54005310 Roller cleaner Cotton tips 9 Fi
176. d Cooling of optics Cooling of intake air using a fan 1 Platen original scanning and RADF original scanning a An original on the original glass is read while moving the exposure unit and V mirror unit b When reading a RADF original the exposure unit and V mirror unit shift to under the original glass 1 Original reading takes place with the original passing over the stationary exposure unit 2 C 1 y N V mirror unit CCD unit RADF original READ SEGTION 3 M2 Scanner Control c Initial operation when power is turned ON When SW2 sub power is turned ON the exposure unit performs home position search The home position search operation differs depending upon whether PS3 is ON or OFF After the home position search the exposure unit waits in the platen mode APS read position 1 When PS3 is ON Shading correction read position Platen APS read position SGND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCDB 5VDC A Reference point PS3 2 When PS3 is OFF M2 scanner is driven by the SCDB scanner drive board and is controlled by the ICB image control board Shading correction read position Related signal is PS3 optics HP 1 Operation en reag a Operation of M2 M2 is a stepping motor which drives the exposure unit It rotat
177. d bit number since the memory is rewritten every time the bit data 1 or 0 is changed Any bit data that has been incorrectly changed must be returned to the original data Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 10 KRDS setting 3 KRDS setting screen Press the 4 KRDS software SW set key 4 KRDS software SW set screen Use the A or v keys to set the switch number Note 1 5 Usethe A or v keys to set the bit number Note 1 6 Press the ON or OFF key to set the bit data 7 Press the RETURN Jkey to end the setting Note 1 The bit of the switch is written in the non volatile memory every time it is changed The numbers shown in the message area are defined as follows KRDS software SW set 01 0 0 80 8 bit switch value is indicated in hexadecimal from 00 to FF Bit data 1 ON 0 OFF Bit number 0 7 Switch number For each switch function refer to List of KRDS Software SWs KRDS 5 Setting type of modem and line 1 Using the switch No 01 enter the modem and line data into the bits O to 7 referring to the following table If telephone line type is Pulse Bit No intialization command AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp 50 amp D2 amp C1 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp S0 E0 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp S50 amp D2 AT amp FEOQOV1X050 1 amp S0 amp M5 AT
178. dard Mode 9 6 9 7 Mode 14 0 14 1 Please insert key counter 0 Auto cancel 0 0 Please insert copy card 1 Auto switching to 1 position 1 0 Please insert coin 0 stapling Inhibit 0 1 25 Summer time setting for WT Weekly Timer Forced 2 points 1 1 Mode 10 0 10 1 10 2 1 e 0 minute 0 0 0 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 150 minutes o a ol a 0 1 0 1 1 29 Operation when stapling cannot be done small size SW14 2 and 14 3 and also when one staple is specified but there is no staple in the position concerned SW14 4 14 5 Mode 14 2 4 14 3 5 Auto cancel 0 0 Auto cancel 1 0 Inhibit 0 1 Forced 1 position stapling 1 1 mode operation 25 ADJUSTMENT 30 Operation when stapling cannot be done small size and also when one staple is specified but there is no staple in the position concerned Mode 14 6 14 7 Auto cancel 0 0 Auto cancel 1 0 Inhibit 0 1 Forced 2 position stapling 1 1 mode operation 31 Fixing temperature at low power mode Mode 16 0 16 1 ldling don t care 0 0 122 1 0 776 0 1 Idling don t care 1 1 32 F4 size setting Mode 17 0 17 1 17 2 8 5x 13 0 0 0 8 25 x 13 1 0 0 8 125 x 13 0 1 0 8x13 1 1 0 8 5 x 13 5 0 0
179. divide the EPROM of the system control ROM into two groups because of its number of EPROM is more tham 12 The timing first time data transfer end timing for the second time the re write operations is performed is as follows The data LED green of the operation part changes from flashing to lighting The remaining EPROM is transferred to the ISW Tool and the ROM data is transferred The LCD goes off during data transfer When data transfer is ended the 25 mode menu screen is displayed If an error occurs in the second ROM data transfer perform the operation again from the beginning first time Data transfer error The Print LED amber lights if a transfer error occurs If an error occurs refer to the section Error handling in the separate ISW Service Handbook and perform the appropriate countermeasures After the countermeasures are completed perform the re write operation again from the beginning KRDS KRDS KRDS 1 Specifications 2 KRDS Setting 1 Type Overall control board built in type This function selects whether to use KRDS 2 KRDS Overall control board Interface between KRDS allows the copy machine to call up the host modem computer periodically and also when there is an 5 232 Compatible abnormality Also data in the copier can be changed from Baud Rate Default 38 4 kbps the host computer KRDS can the above functions for the following 3
180. e 29 0 1 0 swi4 3 B5R 5 5 x 8 5R 0 1 0 4 Operation when one position stapling is not 29 0 0 0 5 available 0 0 0 6 Operation when two staples specified but 30 0 0 0 7 there are no staples in the positions concerned 0 0 0 0 zzzi E 0 0 0 1 Waiting for start of printing when copy reservation Machine does not wait Machine waits 0 0 0 fixing wrinkling countermeasure 0 2 Waiting for start of printing other than copy Machine does not wait Machine waits 0 0 0 reservation fixing wrinkling countermeasure SW15 3 Universal tray changeover screen Yes No special display 0 0 Selection of face up when the by pass feed tray is Yes No 0 selected by the No FNS or Tray 1 output setting 5 series display on universal trays changeover screen Yes No 0 6 FNS tray 1 full detection amp auto tray changeover 100 copies No Yes 0 7 Auto tray changeover when capacity of FNS No Yes 0 0 0 tray 2 3 is exceeded 0 Fixing temperature at low power mode 521 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 Toner auto supply No Yes 0 0 0 3 Copy inhibit flag prior to L detection Copy enabel Copy inhibit 0 0 0 SW16 4 For improved half tone fixing performance when Executed under DIP switch Yes 0 0 0 the machine is first switched in the morning 6 0 condition 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 F4 size setting 32 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 Printer job setting with key counter installed 38 Printing takes place No print 0 0 0
181. e Konica ISW In System Writer Service Handbook ISW 3 Display of operation to rewrite data System control CB program Image control RADF control FNS control program Copier Copier Standby state The START key is reversed grey START key is reversed grey Reading data Reading data Data LED green is lit Data LED green is lit During data LCD screen is extinguished Reading data transmission Data LED green is blinking Data LED green is blinking During data LCD screen is extinguished Writing data rewriting Data LED green is blinking Data LED green is extinguished Rewriting Return to 25 mode menu svreen Finished normally finished Data LED green is extinguished Checksum display in message display area 4 Error displays and response methods a System control program Copier Cause Response method Error generated during reading Transmitted data other 1 Press the STOP CLEAR button on the copier Printer LED red lights than system control data 2 Disconnect the cable and then connect the cable again 3 Start from the beginning for both the copier and the PC The LCD screen is extinguished Abnormality in cable 1 Disconnect the cable and then connect the The error lamp red is lit connection during data cable again transfer 2 Turn the SW1 main power and the SW2 sub power on the copi
182. e b The current selected mode is high lighted 6 Enter time and minute using the numeric keys on according to the mode key the screen then press the SET key At this time the setting contents will be appeared 7 Press the RETURN 0 end the setting in the message indication area at line 2 3 14 KRDS 3 Mode setting method Perform the operation in each mode as follows a Monthly mode a Using the numeric keys enter the day hour and minute b Press the key to enter the input data b If you wish to change the number of an arbitrary position press the or key to move the cursor to the desired position and reenter If reenter the entered data press the Stop clear button to clear the entered data then enter the data again d Weekly mode a Using the numeric keys enter the day of the week hour and minute b The day of the week is entered using the numeric keys according to the following definitions 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Sunday c Press the key to enter the input data e Daily mode a Using the numeric keys enter the hour and minute b Press the key to enter the input data 3 15 f Common operation a The screen will return to the calling time set menu screen if the RETURN key is pressed without pressing the key In this case no entered data will be changed b Pressthe key and then the key to end setting The
183. e SD5 gate SD5 is driven by the PRDB printer drive board Related signals are PS1 paper exit PS28 reversal detection 1 PS29 fixing exit and PS30 reversal detection 2 1 a Operation Straight paper exit control M12 reversal paper exit rotates in the forward direction after the specified time from when PS29 goes ON At this time the switching guide is OFF hence the paper passes over the top of the switching guide and is exited M12 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS1 detects the trailing edge of the paper 2 L 3 Paper reversal and exit control M12 rotates in the forward direction after the specified time from when PS29 goes ON causing the paper to be conveyed to the switching guide At this time SD5 goes ON after the specified time from when MC1 goes ON causing the switching guide to move to the paper reversal and exit side As a result the paper is conveyed to the back side of the reversal and exit section cover lower After the specified time from when PS28 detects the trailing edge of the paper and goes OFF M12 switches to reverse rotation and the paper is fed in the reverse direction The reverse fed paper is prevented from returning to the fixing section by the shape of the switching guide and instead is fed to the paper exit section As a result the paper is exited face down REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SEGTION Signals Input signals PS1 SIG PS1 to PRDB Paper passage detectio
184. e Separation corona TSL Paper feed section section section 1 A 4 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 1 Main Drive Registration MC MC1 Registration roller upper Main motor M1 Registration roller lower Conveyance belt Fixing roller upper Fixing roller lower 1 B 1 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 2 Drum Toner Recycle Drive Drum motor M4 Separation claw swing gear Toner conveyance screw Toner recycle screw 3 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM Developing Drive Developing motor M3 Developing MC MC2 Developing drive input gear 2 Developing sleeve Agitator wheel DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 4 By pass Paper Feed 151 Paper Feed Drive V 777 _ 277 9 Q 2777744 paper feed roller 1st paper feed motor M6 prevention roller By pass SD SD4 R By pass separation roller Paper feed pulley Paper feed pulley Tray motor M8 Separation roller Paper feed roller Double feed prevention roller 1 B 4 DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM 5 ADU Drive Registration roller upper Conveyance roller C Conveyance roller B p SN Registration SER roller lower 522 KR ADU paper feed PR motor M501 m 477 77 DD 777 Cy 0 Q ADU restart MC MC501 ADU loop 502 Conveyance roller A
185. e feed prevention rubber 17 DB middle tray Tray 3 Separation rubber 18 or LCT tray Tray 3 Paper feed rubber 19 Tray 3 Double feed prevention rubber 20 DB lower tray Tray 4 Separation rubber 21 Tray 4 Paper feed rubber 22 Tray 4 Double feed prevention rubber 23 By pass feed unit Separation rubber 24 Paper feed rubber 25 Double feed prevention rubber 26 Fixing unit Fixing cleaning roller 27 Fixing roller 28 Fixing cleaning pad 29 Fixing roller upper 30 Fixing claw upper 31 Heat insulating sleeve 32 Fixing roller lower 33 Fixing claw lower 34 Fixing roller bearing upper 35 Bearing 36 Fixing roller bearing 37 Fixing heater 1 38 Fixing heater 2 39 Fixing filter 40 Ozone filter 41 RADF Pickup roller 42 Forward rotation roller 43 Separation pad 44 Pick up clutch ass y 45 Cleaning ass y 46 FNS FNS T2 exit roller A 47 FNS T3 exit roller A 48 Front stapler 49 Rear stapler 25 ADJUSTMENT 2 Copy count display and count reset by lt List of parts to be replaced arbitrarily gt parts to be replaced Named arbitrarily ivi No Count timing Set the limit value for the parts to be replaced parts No parts name setting copy count display and 01 When copy count at the paper exit is completed count reset 02 When copy count at the paper exit is completed 03 When copy count
186. e set screen 2 Setting method a Using the numeric keys on the screen enter 6 digit number regular count value then press the key b To reenter the entered data press the stop clear button to clear the entered data then enter the data again c The entered numerical value is entered from the number of 4 digit The number is displayed while shifting from right to left d The screen will return to the calling time set menu screen if the RETURN key is pressed without pressing the key In this case no entered data will be changed e Press the key then the key to end the setting The screen will return to the calling time set menu screen Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 10 KRDS setting key 3 KRDS setting screen Press the 1 Calling time set key 4 Calling time set screen Use the 3 Calling mode 3 regular count 5 Calling mode 3 regular count call screen Using the numeric keys on the screen enter number regular count value then press the key 6 Press the RETURN to end the setting 3 16 5 A Point to Notice for Operation Be sure to turn OFF and ON the main power of the copier if the modem power is turned OFF and ON with the main power OFF Reason Toinitialize the modem When the KRDS circuit is powered it automati cally initialized the modem following the modem power ON
187. e than standard value enter a value from the numeric keys then press the SET key to store the adjustment value Input range 31 inward direction of the center line to 31 rear direction of the center line 1 step 0 13mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is within standard value for each paper size 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the NEXT or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the RETURN to return to the timing adj screen Lengthwise direction Standard value Within 3 0 mm life size Miscentering amount between first side and second side 36 C ADJUSTMENT Platen centering adjustment Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj key Timing adj screen Press thel 5 Centring adj key Centring adj screen Press the NEXT until Platen appears the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Set the new pyramid chart on the original glass and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the start button to make test copy Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy Standard value Within 2 mm Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the centring adj screen Centring adj screen
188. eaning Cleaning blade Fixed type Toner recycle Screw conveyance to the developing unit Toner collection Toner collection sheet PAPER FEED UNIT PAPER FEED UNIT 1 Composition lt By pass tray unit gt By pass tray By pass paper pe feed roller By pass separation Paper feed unit roller Separation roller Double feed prevention roller Paper feed roller By pass double feed prevention roller By pass SD 2nd paper feed unit Registration roller upper Registration roller lower By pass separation roller By pass double feed prevention roller By pass paper feed roller Registration paper feed roller Double feed Registration prevention plate roller upper Registration roller lower T3 Registration paper Separation roller feed roller Paper feed IN Le e Paper conveyance roller roller Paper lift up plate Double feed Paper conveyance roller prevention roller 2 J 1 PAPER FEED UNIT 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Paper lift pressure re duction Paper feed roller Paper lift up Paper lift up plate Double feed prevention Torque limiter Tray loading Front loading 151 paper feed Paper feed roller 1st paper feed SD 2nd paper feed Registration roller registration clutch By pass paper feed Paper feed roller By p
189. ect 1 and PS303 original size detect 2 on the paper feed tray of RADF and resistance value of VR301 original size detect During a platen copy operation APS detection is used to detect the original size This is done by combining the ON OFF signals from PS25 APS 1 and PS26 APS 2 with the detection signal from the CCD sensor mounted on ADB READ SEGTION 525 APS 1 PS26 APS 2 detect the original size in the sub scanning direction and the CCD sensor detects the original size in the main scanning direction During APS detection when L1 exposure lamp lights gradations of light intensity occur in the main scanning direction due to the presence of an original The sensor detects these gradations of light intensity along one line and the ICB image control board judges the size of the original in the main scanning direction from the positional relationship between the two points where the light intensity level switches from black generated by sky shot to white generated by the edge of the original Close RADF then detection of the original size in the main scanning direction takes place once again at the instant PS301 DF open close detect goes and the original size is confirmed 525 and PS26 each consist of an LED and photosensor Light emitted from each LED is reflected off the original and received by the photosensor thus enabling the size of the original to be detected The 525 a
190. ection Piezoelectric method 1209 2094 Toner agitation 1 Agitation plate Toner cartridge 2 Rotating cartridge method 22 Capacity 600g Toner leakage Toner supply shutter One way prevention clutch 1 Toner agitation The drive is transmitted from the following two motors via gear group to the agitation plate a Toner supply motor 1 M10 For toner cartridge drive b Toner supply motor 2 M11 For toner conveyance screw drive The agitation plate rotates faster in rotation of the toner supply motor 2 than the toner supply motor 1 When two motors rotate simultaneously the drive of the M10 is transmitted by theone way clutch to the agitation plate shaft 2 1 Toner supply Agitation plate Toner conveyance motor 2 screw TONER SUPPLY UNIT 2 Toner cartridge When the toner cartridge rotates toner moves to the cartridge exit along the spiral groove marked on the surface of the toner cartridge When the cartridge points down toner flow to the toner supply unit agitation and conveyance section Toner is supplied to the agitation conveyance section of the toner supply unit 2 H 2 3 Toner Level Detection Control TONER SUPPLY UNIT CONT UNLOCK SIG TONER LEVEL 5V TONER LEVEL SIG SGND Toner level detection control is carried out by the TLD toner level detector and PRDB printer drive board 1 Operation a Tone
191. ed ON 2 N 2 3 Fan 2 N 4 4 Operation Panel 2 N 5 5 Counter 2 N 7 6 Option 2 N 8 3 DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY EXTERNAL SECTION 3 A 1 1 Replacing the Ozone Filter 3 A 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Rear 3 A 2 3 Replacing the Fixing Filter 3 A 2 4 Removing and Reinstalling the Side Cover right 3 A 2 DRIVE SECTION inntar 3 B 1 1 Disassembly and Reassembly 3 B 1 READ SECTION Rer Ete 3 C 1 1 Screws That Must Not Be Removed 3 C 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the GOD nit sisse aive 3 C 1 3 Replacing the Exposure Lamp L1 3 C 3 4 Removing and Reinstalling the Exposure Unit 3 C 4 5 Removing the Optics Wire 3 C 7 6 Installing the Optics Wire 3 C 10 WRITE UNIT era ii ee 3 D 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Write Unit 3 D 1 2 Cleaning the Dust proof Glass 3 D 3 DRUM rettet ee eerte 3 E 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Drum Unit etes 3 E 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Dr
192. eed adjustment board Step Operation procedure 1 Make a copy and measure the paper skew 2 Loosen the two set screws on the paper feed unit 23 Rotate and adjust the double feed adjustment plate in the paper feed direction For fast copies from the front Rotate in direction For fast copies from the front Rotate in B direction 4 Loosen the screws and make second copy adjusting the paper skew 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the paper skew is within the specified range below Specified range Paper skew 0 8 Main body 1 3 96 System Paper skew in the paper feed direction OTHER ADJUSTMENT 5 RADF Skew Adjsutment DF 315 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips head 2 Adjustment method Skew adjustment screw Step Operation procedure 1 Set a paper into the tray main body 2 Set the adjustment chart on the RADF make copy and check the skew Standart value within 0 3 Feed direction f VN Skew pattern pattern Perform the follow adjustment if the skew is beyond the standard value 3 Open the RADF and loosen the four hinge set screws two on both the left and right 1 91 Step Operation procedure Close the RADF tune the skew adjustment screws and adjust the skew For skew patte
193. en disconnecting any cables always grasp the connector and not the cable especially in the case of and high voltage leads Carefully remove all toner remnants from electrical parts electrodes etc Make sure that wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges burrs or other pointed parts Double check to make sure that all screws compo nents wiring connectors etc that were removed for safety check maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location Pay special attention to forgot ten connectors pinched cables forgotten screws etc Wheninstallation and preventive maintenance verify that the power cord has been securely plugged into the AC outlet Contact problems may lead to in creased resistance overheating and the risk of fire 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N WARNING 1 Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit or any parts that use a laser make sure that the power cord has been disconnected Do notremovethe main cover of the write unit Direct exposure of the eye to laser beams may lead to blindness Do not turn the copier on while the write unit is not installed in its normal position Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced replace only with the same or equivalent recom mended by the manufacturer Discard used batter ies according to the manufacture s instructions 2 3 4 VORSICHT Expiosionsgefahr dei unsachegemaBem Austausch der Batt
194. entered and check the entered data The screen will return to the calling time setting menu screen if the RETURN key is pressed without pressing the SET key In this case no entered data will be changed KRDS i Press the key and then the RETURN 2 Setting regular date amp time calling key to end setting The screen will return to the rm The copier will call the host at the regular time specified calling time set menu screen 1 Screen selection Step Operation procedure Select the 2 Calling mode 2 regular data amp time 1 Enterthe 25 mode calling setting in the calling time set menu screen to 2 25 mode menu screen display the calling mode 2 regular data amp time Press the 10 KRDS setting key calling setting screen 3 KRDS setting screen Press the key to exit the calling mode 2 Press the 1 Calling time set key regular data amp time calling setting screen and return 4 Calling time set screen to the calling time set menu screen Use 1 Calling mode 1 Setting designated date calling setting 2 Mode selecting method 5 Calling mode 1 Designed date calling a Select and press the desired mode in the screen monthly weekly daily keys Enter year month and day using the numeric There are three mode type month week day key on the screen then press thel lt lt key that can be set to move the cursor to entering position of tim
195. er OFF and ON Data lamp green lights 3 Send the system control program once again from the PC b Image control RADF control FNS control program Copier Cause Response method Error generated during reading Data for a different control 1 Press the STOP CLEAR button on the copier Printer LED red lights program was sent 2 Disconnect the cable and then connect the cable again 3 Start from the beginning for both the copier and the PC Error generated during writing Abnormality in cable 1 Disconnect the cable and then connect the Printer LED red lights connection during data cable again transfer 2 Press the STOP CLEAR button on the copier 3 Start from the beginning for both the copier and the PC ISW Types and quantity of re write ROM When rewriting the copier flash ROM data using the ISW Tool rewriting EPROM must be prepared The following table lists rewriting EPROM prepared for this machine Caution Quantity of the rewriting EPROM and transfer file size are subject to change without previous notice Target control Quantity ISW Trns file program of ROM size bin file System control 17 Approx 7 5 MB Image control 2 Approx 0 6 MB RADF control 1 Approx 0 1 MB FNS control 1 Approx 0 2 MB Re write precautions using the ISW Tool System control ROM re write The re write operation must be performed to
196. eration becomes unavailable 25 Mode Menu Screen 18 date Press the desired item key on the LCD screen Each setting screen will appear Enter values in the setting screen for each item Setting SW2 to OFF cancels the 25 mode The newly entered values become effective after the machine is restarted 1 6 2 Setting Software SW 1 Setting method This setting specifies the software switch on the software SW setting screen Caution The bit of the switch is written in the non volatile memory every time it is changed The numbers shown in the message area are defined as follows Software SW 04 7 1 A8 8 bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF Bit data 1 0 OFF Bit number 0 to 7 Switch number 2 Setting procedures Step Operation procedure Enter the 25 Mode 25 mode menu screen Press the 1 Software SW key Software SW screen Select switch number Use the left iv key Select bit number of the switch Use the center A Y Select ON 21 OFF 20 of the switch Use or key ON Set bit OFF Clear bit Press the Return key to return to the 25 mode menu screen For each switch function refer to List of Software switches 25 ADJUSTMENT List of software switches
197. error codes refer to the L detection error code list of List of warning error codes High voltage adjustment Dmax correction L detection adjustment This adjustment be made immediately after replacement of the developer before any copies are 9 Automatic toner supply made with the new developer Developing counter is Normally toner supply take place automatically so there automatically reset is no need to carry out these operations in the field Caution After replacing the developer do not make copies until you have performed L detection adjustment 1 37 36 ADJUSTMENT 3 Timing Adjustment This function adjusts each timing When timing adjustment is performed use A3 or 11 x 17 size paper 1 Select 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen The timing adjustment menu screen will appear Timing adjustment menu Vertical horizontal magnification adjustment Restart timing adjustment Paper feed loop amount adjustment 1 2 3 4 Leading edge original erasure amount adjustment 5 Centering adjustment 6 Image read point adjustment 7 Restoring standard data Press the item key to be adjusted The selected setting screen will appear 1 38 Vertical Horizontal magnification adjustment Adjust the vertical horizontal magnification at the zoom mode Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the timing adjustment menu screen will appear Select the Drum cl
198. erse Paper exit jam RADF original 13 ADF mixed original mode original passage count ER 18 34 2 Reverse Paper EE 19 34 3 Reverse Paper exit jam 14 RADF mixed original mode original 20 34 4 Reverse Paper exit jam feed counter 21 34 5 ADU conveyance jam 22 97 1 ADU conveyance jam Maximum count number 99 999 999 23 92 0 ADU conveyance jam 24 25 26 61 0 RADF 27 61 1 RADF 28 n 29 62 1 RADF 30 62 2 RADF 31 62 3 RADF 32 62 4 RADF 33 62 5 RADF 34 63 0 RADF 35 63 1 RADF 36 63 2 RADF 37 63 3 RADF 38 63 4 RADF 1 20 No Jam Classification 39 63 5 RADF 40 63 6 RADF 41 63 7 RADF 42 72 10 FNS 43 72 11 FNS 44 72 12 FNS 45 72 13 FNS 46 72 14 FNS 47 72 15 FNS 48 72 16 FNS 49 72 21 FNS 50 72 22 FNS Maximum count number 999 999 1 21 25 ADJUSTMENT 3 Collecting data 3 lt Copy count by each mode gt No Contents 0 Platen single side single side RADF double side single side 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 z 3 4 RADF double side double side 6 RADF single side double side 07 08 FNS Staple mode FNS Sort mode 09 10 FNS Group mode FNS No of stapling 1 Life size 1 12 Fixed ratio E3 1 41 2 00 13 Fixed ratio E2 1 22 1 55 Fixed ratio E1 1 15 1 29 Fixed ratio R1 0 86 0 77 7 r 3 1 4 5 1 0 3 6 Fixed ra
199. es in the forward or reverse direction and also changes speed according to the particular 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I scanning control operation The position of the exposure unit is controlled and Reference point PS3 monitored by PS3 alone The drive period and direction of rotation of M2 are controlled by the d Shading correction read operation number of count pulses from when PS3 goes ON or The white reference plate is glued at the back of the OFF original glass and the shading correction is carried out The ICB continuously monitor the state of motion of when the SW is turned on and every scanning job M2 It acquires the control timing related to paper feed from the number of drive count pulses The ICB continuously monitors the motion of M2 It acquires the control timing related to paper feed from the number of drive count pulses e Exposure scan mode There are two exposure scanning modes a platen mode and a DF mode In the platen mode the exposure unit scans and b Scanning speed of the exposure unit reads the original in the same way as in a Scanning speed conventional copying machine In the DF mode however the exposure unit remains fixed in the Magnification Scanning speed specified position and instead the RADF conveys the Forward 210 mm sec 1 1 original causing it to be read Return 862 mm sec Max 2 C 2 Scanning operation during DF mode The read position in the
200. essure release lever 2 Ka AA AA Y N 9 cms Pressure release lever 4 Pressure release lever Pressure Release NY IR E 7 2 K 1 FIXING UNIT 3 Fixing Temperature Control L2 DRIVE L3 DRIVE L2 CONT L3 CONT RL CONT TH1 ANG1 TH1 TH1 ANG2 TH2 ANG1 TH2 TH2 ANG2 The fixing roller upper is heated by L2 fixing heater lamp 1 and L3 fixing heater lamp 2 The PRDB printer drive board detects the temperature of the fixing roller upper by means of TH1 fixing temperature sensor 1 and TH2 fixing temperature sensor 2 and controls L2 and L3 via DCPS1 Operation Temperature control Warm up The PRDB turns ON the fixing heater lamp circuit in DCPS1 DC power supply 1 as soon as the machine is switched ON causing L2 and L3 to go ON until the fixing roller upper reaches the specified temperature After the completion of warm up the PRDB goes ON and OFF repeatedly so as to maintain the set temperature Setting temperature 195 Warm up time Within 90 seconds Room temperature 20 2 K 2 Protection against abnormality TS thermostat is used to prevent the temperature of the fixing roller upper from rising abnormally This thermostat is not in contact with the fixing roller upper The operating temperature of the thermostat is shown below
201. etie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers 3 Handling of Materials for Servicing A CAUTION Drumcleaner alcohol based and roller cleaner acetone based are highly flam mable and must be handled with care When using these materials for clean ing of copier parts observe the follow ing precautions 1 Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet 2 Use only small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid If this happens immedi ately wipe it off Perform cleaning only in an environment where sufficient ventilation is assured Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discom fort Do not replace the cover or turn the unit on before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated A CAUTION Toner and developer are not harmful substances but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes etc It may be stimulative If the sub stances get in the eye rinse it with plenty of water immediately When symptoms are noticeable consult a physician 3 4 4 Measures to Take in Case of an Accident 1 Ifanaccidenthas occurred the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency mea sures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage 2
202. flow Scanner stops immediately ICB image control board F46 11 counter overflow ADB A D converter board L1 INVB L1 inverter board DCPS1 DC power supply 1 L1 exposure lamp F49 2 LDB laser diode board The machine stops ICB image control board connection abnormality immediately and main relay LDB laser drive board F49 4 INDEXSB index sensor board and 24VDC are turned OFF INDEXSB index sensor board connection abnormality ICB image control board F49 6 ADB A D converter board Scanner stops immediately ICB image control board connection abnormality ADB A D converter board Motor F51 2 Speed abnormality in the M1 The machine stops PRDB printer drive board abnormality main immediately and main relay M1 main and 24VDC are turned OFF F51 3 Speed abnormality in the M10 If a copy being made whenan PRDB printer drive board toner supply 1 error occurs the machine M10 toner supply 1 stops immediately after completion of exit of the copy and main relay and 24VDC are turned OFF F51 4 Speed abnormality in the M3 The machine stops PRDB printer drive board developing immediately and main relay developing F51 5 Speed abnormality in the M4 and 24VDC are turned OFF PRDB printer drive board drum M4 drum F51 6 Speed abnormality in the M5 ICB image control board polygon SCDB scanner drive board M5 polygon F51 7 Speed abnormality in the M501 PRDB printer drive boar
203. g abnormality is If a copy being made when an CB control board processing detected on the CB control error occurs the machine SCDB scanner drive board abnormality board stops immediately after completion of exit of the copy and main relay and 24VDC are turned OFF Control E89 01 Job object pointer abnormality The machine stops CB control board board The page management object is immediately ICB image control board communi not obtained with any causes PRDB printer control board cation 89 02 Memory copy sequence SCDB scanner drive board abnormality abnormality 89 03 Through copy sequence abnormality Cause can not be determined E89 04 Memory scan signal stop is not completed E89 05 Memory printer signal stop is not completed E89 06 SW2 sub power OFF process The machine stops immedi CB control board JAM ERROR CODES When any one of the following abnormality occurs the user can disconnect the faulty unit temporarily When an error code is displayed press the AUTO RESET button and turning the SW2 sub power OFF ON according to the LCD message allows you to use the mchine until you turn the SW2 OFF ON again Warning code Contents Separation subjects Remarks 10 3 DB communication abnormality DB unit all tray Tray can not be selected 18 2 Tray lower lifting abnormality Main body lower tray 18 3 DB tray upper lifting abnormality DB upper
204. g knob C ring Bearing Jo Fixing Eid lower Bearing 10 Reinstall the fixing roller lower in the opposite se quence to removal Caution When installing the bearing make sure that the flange of the bearing set into the U groove of the fixing unit securely 9 Removing and Reinstalling the Fixing Temperature Sensor 1 and 2 TH1 and TH2 NCaution After reinstalling fixing temperature sensor 2 and check that the sensor wires are not touching with the fixing roller upper Caution After installing the fixing tempera ture sensor 2 check that sensor section of the fixing temperature sen sor 2 contact with the fixing roller upper Caution Be sure to apply paint lock to the set screw of the installed sensor Removal procedure Remove the fixing unit from the main body Remove the oil supply unit from the fixing unit Remove the two set screws then release the fastening of the connector CN390 Cut the two wiring bands then remove the pins 10 to 13 of connector CN390 with tweezers Connector CN390 Pin 3 K 7 FIXING UNIT 5 Remove the two set screws then remove the fixing temperature sensor 1 6 Remove the two set screws then remove the fixing temperature sensor 2 Set screws Set screws
205. ginal on the RADF then press the Start button 4 Press the stop clear button 5 Press the P button 6 Press 1 by means of the numeric keys Check that 069 001 appears in the message display area 7 Setthe size original on the RADF then press the start button 8 To end the adjustment press the stop clear button 9 To end the 47 mode turn off the SW2 sub power 47 ADJUSTMENT 5 E RDH Memory Check Perform this adjustment when memory is expanded Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode screen Press 1 9 7 by means of the numeric keys Check that 197 000 appears in the message display area 3 Press the start button The OUT entry in the message display area indicates the total size of the E RDH memory inclusive of the 32MB provided as standard 32MB standard 0032 32MB 64MB 0096 32MB 64MB 64MB 0160 32MB 128MB 0160 32MB 128MB 128 0288 Press the stop clear button 47 mode screen Enter a value of 1 9 8 using the numeric keys Be sure that 198 000 appears in the message display area Press the start button The system begins executing a memory check The OUT entry in the message area displays NOW while checking is in progress then displays OK if all memory is operating correctly To end the check press the stop clear button T
206. ging corona unit and PCL in the opposite sequence to removal 8 F 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer and Separation Corona Unit NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Procedure Open the front door and release the conveyance lever Remove the one set screw then pull the transfer and separation corona unit forward to remove it Caution Take care not to drop the set screws into the main body Set screw Conveyance lever Transfer and separation corona unit 3 Reinstall the transfer and separation corona unit in the opposite sequence to removal CORONA UNIT SECTION 3 Removing and Reinstalling the Charging Control Plate Caution Install the charging control plate so that the end with the round holes has the springs hooking it to the rear of the charging corona unit a Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section 2 Remove the charging corona unit 3 Remove the two charging control springs then remove the charging control plate 4 Remove dirt from the charging control plate by gently dabbing it with cloth moistened with drum cleaner then remove any remaining dirt with blower brush Charging control springs Charging control plate 3 F 2 5 Reinstall the charging control plate the opposite seque
207. ging prevention plate Hooks CORONA UNIT SECTION 5 Remove the spark arrestor plates front and rear Spark arrestor plate front Spark arrestor 2 plate rear gt k 9 6 Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaning Blocks C and D Procedure Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section Remove the charging corona unit Remove the charging control plate Remove the charging wire cleaning block 6 Remove the springs one spring for each wire then remove the transfer wire and separation wire 7 Remove the support rubber from each wire Separation wire Support rubbers Support rubbers Springs Transfer wire Changing control spring Charging wire cleaning block C 8 Reinstall the transfer and separation wires in the oppo site sequence to removal Caution When installing the charging control spring be careful of the attachment direction of the spring Charging Charging control spring SJ control spring CORONA UNIT SECTION Remove the charging cover rear Remove the charging wire from the spring Remove the charging wire cleaning block D and cleaner mount assembly 39 Charging cover rear Ve Charging wire
208. he calculation is defective 0080 Dmax sensor de The Dmax sensor value was below tection value error the standard and so the PWM correc tion curve could not be calculated 0100 Dmax sensor de The density of the patch read by the tection value error Dmax sensor 15 almost the same for the lowest and highest density and so the PWM correction curve could not be calculated 0200 Dmaxsensorproof There was no difference between the ing error lowestandhighestdensity inthe Dmax sensor ouputconverted with the proof ing value and so the PWM correction curve could not be calculated 0800 Gammacurveerror The PWM correction curve prepared by calculation has a special attribute that does not allow it to be increased mo notonously and so could not be used occur even when performing proper operations due to discrepancies in the values read by the machine return to a Dmax correction and repeat 2 3 times put patch preparation between charging developer TCSB toner control sensor board reader re lated items Caution The error code for Gamma correction and Gamma Curve preparation is displayed in a 4 digit hex value and when multiple errors occur the results of the sum is displayed For example when error codes 0400 and 0800 happen at the same time 0 00 1 59 ADJUSTMENT This page left blank intentionally for editorial reasons 1 60 36 ADJUSTMENT 2 R
209. he center line 1 step 0 04mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is within standard value for each adjustment 11 12 To adjust another adjustment item press the or BACK key to select the desired adjustment Press RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen 36 ADJUSTMENT 6 Image read point adjustment Rest standard data Adjust the image read point Reset the adjusted set values of timing adjustment to Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu the standard values factory default data screen then the timing adjustment screen will Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu appear screen then the timing adjustment menu screen will Select the 6 Read point adj on this screen then the read point adjustment screen will appear Select the 7 Factory default on this screen then the Caution If you shift this value by large amount appear the RADF read density may change This adjustment can reset the following item adjusted set values to the standard values factory default Step Operation procedure data These can be selected by pressing the NEXT 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen magnification drum clock adjustment Press 2 Timing adj Restart timing adjustment 3 Timing adj screen Paper feed loop amo
210. he non vola tile memory method Displays the result and DmaxLED sleeve rotation value at Dmax correction completion SGU pattern print Output the specified SGU pattern from the basic screen Gamma correction Read the output SGU pattern using the scanner then calculate the PWM gamma correction value and display the result Gamma curve preparation Create the gamma curve with the Start print button ON 2 RADF scanner None Make a density adjustment by letting the density adjustment machine read white chart 3 Non original erasure None Check with RADF opened completely installation survey 36 ADJUSTMENT No Menu No Sub menu Circular menu Summary of operation 7 List print 1 Test pattern None Grid pattern with 2 dots in width of line and 500 dots at intervals of lines 2 Font pattern None Built in font pattern Those for Japan include kanji characters 3 Memory dump list None Print dump of data stored from the specified address in Hex and ASCII formats 4 Management list None Print the condition of the machine counter data information and jam history 5 Adjustment list None Print only 25 36 mode adjustment value from the machine management list 6 Log list 1 None Print dump of data stored from the specified 7 Log list 2 address in Hex and ASCII formats 8 RADF adjustment 1 Drum clock Vertical magnification adjustment of RADF After making an adjustment make cop
211. hown below Paper size _ SW101 5 102 SW103 SW104 11x17 OFF OFF OFF ON 8 5 14 ON OFF OFF ON 85x11 ON ON ON ON B5 ON OFF ON ON A4R OFF ON ON OFF B5R ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 8 5 x 11R ON OFF ON OFF 2 J 6 By pass tray paper size detection The size in the lengthwise direction of the paper in the by pass tray is detected by the ON OFF state of PS27 and the size in the widthwise direction is detected by the resistance of VR1 which varies according to the position of the guide on the by pass tray Signals Input signals PS SIG PS27 to PRDB By pass tray lengthwise direction paper size detection signal L 8 5 x 14 size or larger H 8 5 x 11R size or less VR1 ANG SIG VR1 to PRDB By pass tray widthwise direction paper size detection signal 6 No Paper Detection Control PAPER FEED UNIT SGND PS13 SIG 5VDC No paper detection takes place by PS31 no paper detect and PS13 no paper by pass which are controlled by the PRDB printer drive board 1 Operation a No paper detection control When a paper feed tray or the by pass tray becomes empty PS31 or PS13 goes ON As a result a message is displayed on the LCD display board via the OB operation board 2 Signals a Input signals 1 PS13 SIG PS13 to PRDB By pass tray no paper detection signal L No paper in t
212. ial number display procedure Select 8 Serial number in the 25 mode screen The serial number setting screen will appear The item name and serial number are displayed on the serial number setting screen Each serial number is displayed at the right side of each unit You can set the destination of the machine by pressing the DESTINATION key Press the RETURN key to end setting and return to the 25 mode menu screen 2 Setting and changing serial number On the serial number setting screen select the desired item then each serial number setting screen will appear Step Operation procedure 3 Changing the destination setting To change the destination setting press the DESTINATION key on the serial number setup menu The procedure is as follows Step Operation procedure Enter the 25 mode 25 mode menu screen Press the 8 Serial No Serial No screen Press the DESTINATION Destination set screen Use the key to select the destination Press OK to register the setting and to return to the serial number setting screen Note Note If you press CANCEL key the copier will retain the previous destination setting and return you to the serial number setting Screen Destination codes Code Destination Code Destination JP Japan TW Taiwan US U S A EU Europe KR South Korea CN China
213. in a certain period after SD402 remove the jammed paper feed middle has been turned paper and close it ON DB lower J15 5401 paper feed detect is not turned o tray ON within a certain period after SD403 paper feed lower has been turned ON Paper feed J16 is PS16 registration is not turned ON Open the main body conveyance 5 within certain period after PS17 no conveyance door DB feed or 5401 paper feed detect has conveyance door or been turned ON front door and remove the jammed paper and close it Others J20 1 During copying the front door or exit The main body is Remove the jammed door was opened stopped immediately paper and close it J20 2 During copying the main body conveyance door was opened 8 20 3 During copying the FNS was opened 2 Paper feed J30 PS16 registration is not turned OFF Open the front door and conveyance within certain period after MC1 remove the jammed 5 registration has been turned ON paper and close it J31 PS29 fixing exit is not turned ON within 2 certain period after MC1 registration 55 has been turned ON 2 Fixing J32 PS1 paper exit is not turned ON within Open the exit door and 8 Paper exit a certain period after PS29 fixing exit remove the jammed ADU has been turned ON at the straight paper and close it eject mode J33 PS1 paper exit is not turned OFF 6 1 JAM ERROR CODES Classifica Jam Operation when jam oc
214. ing iu 4 Remove the four claw springs from the fixing claws Heat Fixing roller upper A upper 2 1 P 5 Pull out the shaft holding the fixing claws upper then jus Dad remove the four fixing claws upper Fixing gear insulation ay St sleeve ee 9 LL AES KS 22 2 C ring Bearing Front side Ls Rear side Fixing upper 10 Reinstall the fixing roller upper in the opposite se quence to removal Claw spring 6 Reinstall the fixing claw upper in the opposite se quence to removal 3 K 4 6 Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Exit Roller Unit lower Caution When installing the paper exit roller unit lower be sure not to damage the roller by the claw a Procedure 1 Remove the fixing unit from the main body 2 Openthe paper exit roller unit upper then remove the oil supply unit 3 Remove the five set screws with step holding the paper exit roller unit lower 4 Be careful so that the fixing claw lower does not damage the fixing roller and remove the paper exit roller unit lower from the fixing unit Set screws with step Paper exit roller unit N lower N 5 Reinstall the paper exit roller unit lower in the opposite sequence to removal 3 K 5 FIXING UNIT 7 Removing and Reinstalling the 2 Fixing Claw lower Caution The fixing claw lower should
215. instructions on setting up the 7045 to run ISW For how to run ISW Trns and ISW Tool refer to Konica ISW In System Writer Servise Handbook Note Procedures for using ISW Tools to update ROM data in Konica ISW In system Writer Servise Handbook are divided into three types by copier model For this unit see Updating the Type B Model 2 1 ISW SETUP 1 2 Boards that Support ISW The following boards in the 7045 permit programs that use ISW to be rewritten 1 CB control board 1 ICB image control board ff DFCB RADF control board 1 FNSCB FNS control board Operating Method ISW connector The ISW connector is next to the total counter in the front door The connector DC 5V jack for the ISW Too is below the KRDS connector 25 pin The cap or seal that covers each connector must be removed only when using it ISW connector KRDS connector DC5V jack 2 2 2 Preparing the copier for re writing Before operating the ISW maintain the copier in ISW mode Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 11 ISW key ISW menu screen Select the ROM where the ROM data to be rewritten Program rewrite screen Pressing key after key is displayed cause the machine to be data waiting condition Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in th
216. ioal not to function non image area erase is found Please confirm adjustment the Service Hand book 96 mode colums of Remedy 2 If you use the non original erasure function relatively infrequently you can use the machine in its present installation environment If however you copy originals that have a dark background fairly frequently re install the machine in a dark location and facing a direction such that external light does not get into it then carry out the installation survey once again In this case if there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light directly above the machine reconsider the installation location and direction or take steps to block off the light from the light source by using a cover for example then carry out the installation survey once again 36 ADJUSTMENT 8 List print Select the 7 List Print from the 36 Mode Menu Screen to display the List Print Menu Screen You can select following menu options from this screen Test pattern Font pattern Memory list Management list Adjustment list Log List 1 Log List 2 Caution Don t try to touch a mode not mentioned 1 Test pattern This option is used to output a grid pattern consisted of line width of 2 dots and line to line space of 500 dots From this pattern you can check the write system for normal performance 2 Font pattern This option
217. ion Caution 1 Caution 2 Do not energize the write unit when itis not installed in the machine Never remove the cover from the write unit with the circuit being energized If the laser beam gets into your eyes you may lose your sight Never remove the write unit for at least two minutes after turning OFF the main switch Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet When removing the write unit do not make contact with the write mirror and dust proof glass prevention of the scratch and stain for the mirror When installing the write cover check that the write cover is got caught in the ground spring 8 D 1 Procedure Remove the original glass Refer to Read section Remove the six set screws and disconnect the connec tor CN93 then remove the write cover Set screws Write cover WRITE UNIT 3 Remove the rear cover Refer to External section 4 Remove the three set screws holding the scanner drive board SCDB Caution Be careful not to drop screws etc between the boards at the rear of the main body Scanner drive board Set screws Set screw 5 Remove the side cover right Refer to External section 6 Remove the cover plate Refer to Read section 7 Disconnect two connectors CN 12 13 the image control board ICB Refer t
218. ion Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet Caution 1 When removing the lamp terminals be sure to hold the contact terminal Caution 2 Never pull the cord Caution 3 not touch the glass of the L1 with bare hands Caution 4 Check to ensure that you have not forgotten to insert a connector or install a screw and also that a cord is not crushed a Procedure Remove the two set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate Remove the three set screws with step then remove the original stopper plate rear Remove the original glass Original stopper plate rear Set screws with step Set screws with step Original glass 3 C 3 READ SECTION 4 S Remove the read cover front Remove the two set screws then remove the glass stopper plate Set screws lt Glass stopper plate lt lt i m di i cover When re installing the original stopper plate ensure that the film attached to the original glass 1 is on top of the glass stopper plate front Caution 6 Remove the three set screws and move the read cover rear to the rear 9 Set screws 9 Ne Read cover rear 7 Move the exposure unit to the position of the notch in the main body frame at the rear READ SEGTION 8 Remove the two set screws from the exposure lamp
219. ion abnormality Output signals FAN H L SCDB to FM2 FM2 scanner coding rotational speed switching signal L High speed H Low speed 24V DRIVE PRDB to FM3 FM3 main body coding drive control signal H L CONT PRDB to FM3 rotational speed switching signal L High speed H Low speed 24V DRIVE PRDB to FM4 conveyance suction drive control signal L FM4 OFF H FM4 ON FAN DRIVE DCPS1 to FM5 FM5 DCPS cooling drive signal FM5 CONT PRDB to DCPS1 FM5 drive control signal L FM5 ON H FM5 OFF FAN DRIVE PRDB to FM6 FM6 polygon cooling draiver signal 2 N 5 4 Operation Panel Control OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL LCDD3 S GND LCD D1 LCD XSCL S GND YD OP TXD S GND OP RTS OP RXD S GND OP CTS 5VDC INV ON PWM S GND OBINVB LCDD2 S GND LCD DO LCD LP S GND X DISP OFF OP RST The operation panel consists of OB operation board and the LCD display board On the display board is mounted an LCD The LCD has backlight which is powered by the OBINVB OB inverter and touch switches which are linked to the displayed contents Control of the operation panel is done by OB based on serial data output from CB control board Operation LED ON operation The LEDs on OB are turned ON and OFF by the CPU in the OB The CPU in the OB is turned ON and OFF according to serial data from the CB OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL LCD disp
220. ion is the same Sort Group Non sort are the same Output direction is the same Paper exit tray is the same The functions as below not selected Booklet Memory copy Imageinsert Single stop Interleave Rotation sort Rotaion group Watermark Stamp Page Date Numberring Overlay and Mixed APS 37 Image leading edge position adjustment Mode 25 0 4 25 1 5 25 2 6 25 3 7 0mm position adjustment 0 0 0 0 0 5mm 1 0 0 0 3 5mm 1 1 1 0 0 5mm 1 0 0 1 3 5mm 1 1 1 1 38 Printer job setting with key counter installed When key counter is installed both copy job and printer job are counted if the setting is 0 and printer job is done before or after copying If the setting is 1 only copy job is counted but printer job is not counted 3 Paper Size Setting This function stores the paper size in the memory of the main body if it has been changed Paper size setting menu Destination setting AB size series Inch size series Caution The number of item keys displayed differs depending upon the installed DB Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 Mode Menu Screen Press the key 3 Paper size screen Press the tray key to be changed Press the A key to select paper size Press the RETURN key to return to the 25 mode menu screen Reference1 When the DB 208 20
221. iscentering is more than standard value enter a value from the numeric keys then press the SET key to store the adjustment value Input range 31 inward direction of the center line to 31 rear direction of the center line 1 step 0 13mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is within standard value Note 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the NEXT or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 12 Note Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen If it can not be adjusted within the specified range refer to OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 1 45 b ADUcentering adjustment Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the key Timing adj screen Press the 5 Centring adj key Centring adj screen Press the NEXT key until ADU appears in the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Select copy mode to single side double side mode then press the start button to print the SGU pattern Fold the output SGU pattern at the center in the paper feed direction and check that the left and right lines overlap completely Standard value Face side Within 3 mm Back side Within 3 mm Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the centring adj screen Centring adj screen If the miscentering is mor
222. it of each part setting screen Press the NO RETURN key then the copy Enter new value using the numeric keys count is not reset and returns to the copy count 7 Press the SET key to enter the limit value that screen by parts counter set has been entered 8 Press the RETURN key to return to the count of 1 26 parts Named screen Caution When pressing the RETURN key without Reference pressing the key the setting is complete without changing a new limit value and returns to the count of parts Named screen The right side of the limit value will be marked sk if the copy count exceeds its limit value 25 ADJUSTMENT 3 Parts No setting Enter the new parts No 8 digit from the numeric keys and alphabet keys on the screen Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press 5 Parts counter key Parts counter set screen Press the 2 Count of parts Named key Count of parts Named screen Press the Jor v to select the data to be set or changed Press the P N set key Set part No screen Enter new parts No using the numeric and alphabet keys Press the SET to enter the parts No that has been entered 8 Press the RETURN key to return to the count of parts Named screen Caution When pressing the key without pressing the key the setting is
223. itch for 8 5 14 F4 0 0 0 Latin America U S A only 3 Copy setting of platen small size Copy as APS detected Copy as nonstandard size 0 0 0 8 5 x 11 or smaller 4 Job suspension end at pulling out key If SW1 0 0 Stop paper If SW1 0 0 Stop paper 0 0 0 SW21 counter feed and terminate feed and printing is interrupted If SW1 0 1 Immediate If SW1 0 1 Immediate stop jam stop jam 5 Copy setting of platen small size Copy as APS detected Copy on A4 8 5 x 11 size 0 0 0 A4 8 5 11 or smaller regardless of the size detected by APS 6 Total counter key counter increment Normal operation Both the total In the copy mode both the total operation counter and the key counter count counter 4 key counters count up 0 0 0 regardless of the mode In the printer mode only the total counter counts up 7 Countermeasure for by pass feed special thick paper No Yes 0 0 0 Turns ON the sub power switch when the No Yes WUT increase 0 0 main power switch is turned ON 34 1 0 0 0 SW22 2 gt ud 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 Running mode 6 agitation rotation time 4 minutes 2 minutes 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 Display of starting date on P mode Do not display Display 0 0 0 25 ADJUSTMENT Default values SW BIT Functions 0 1 No Japan U S A Europe Search start tray setting for APS 35 0 1 0 SW23 SW24
224. judged to be an abnormal discharge HV2 high voltage unit 2 Separation corona unit 6 5 JAM ERROR CODES Classifica tion Warn ing code Causes Operation in case of warning occurrence Estimated abnormal parts Fixing high temperature abnormality F34 1 1 fixing temperature 1 detect ing temperature fixing tempera ture exceeds approx 225 20 Fix ing high temperature abnormality detection software operates F34 2 1 fixing temperature 1 detect ing temperature fixing tempera ture exceeds approx 235 26 Fix ing high temperature abnormality detection circuit operates F34 3 TH2 fixing temperature 2 detect ing temperature fixing tempera ture exceeds approx 235 26 Fix ing high temperature abnormality detection software operates F34 4 TH2 fixing temperature 2 detect ing temperature fixing tempera ture exceeds approx 250 26 Fix ing high temperature abnormality detection circuit operates Fixing low temperature F35 1 Warm up is not completed within 180 seconds from the start of the warm up Fixing low temperature abnormality detection software op erates F35 2 After completion of warm up fixing temperature is lower than 30 Fixing law temperature abnormal ity software operates Fixing sensor abnormality open circuit F36 1 Fixing temperature is not reached 30 C within 50 seconds from
225. justment Be sure that the RADF is fully open Do not place anything on the platen 1 The platen glass must not be dirty Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen 6 Image quality adj key Press the 3 Image quality adj screen Press the 3 Non image Area Erase check key Non image area erase check screen START key Press the 5 Confirm that Operation OK appears on the message display If Operation NG appears carry out non original erasure installation survey once again while referring to Trouble and Remedy below 6 Press the RETURN key to return to the image quality adjustment screen 1 62 lt Trouble and Remedy gt Warning 1 Adjust for Extreme Brightness In many cases the Non image area erase function will not operate correctly Please confirm adjustment 36 mode columns of the Service Hand book Remedy 1 If you use the non original erasure function or copy originals that have dark background using the non original erasure method relatively infrequently use the machine in its present installation environment If however you copy originals that have a dark background fairly frequently re install the machine in a dark location and facing a direction such that external light does not get into it then carry out the Warning 2 A datum with potent
226. key to enter the master key code that has been entered Press the RETURN key to return to the password setting screen Caution When pressing the RETURN key without pressing the key the setting is complete without changing a new EKC master key code and returns to the password setting screen Reference When 00000000 is set as the pass word the EKC setting menu screen will be displayed instead of the password entry screen Setting the weekly timer master key This function sets the weekly timer master key required for entering the various weekly timer set mode Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 6 Password setting Password setting screen Press the 3 Weekly timer master key set key Weekly timer master key set screen Enter 4 digit new weekly timer master key using the numeric keys Press the SET key to enter the weekly timer master key that has been entered Press the RETURN key to return to the password setting screen Caution When pressing the RETURN key without pressing the key the setting is complete without changing a new weekly timer master key and returns to the password setting screen Reference When setting the master key to 0000 the weekly timer mode can be used without a password 1 29 25 ADJUSTMENT 8
227. large RADF Iside 000 RADF Zside 000 Lead edge timing Lead ed e tinind 00 1 Centring adi Bypass 004 004 081 004 004 009 009 DUC 000 000 ADUGSS 000 000 RAF sido 03 08 Read point adi Iten Default Iten Setting Platen 002 x __ RUF 000 000 Overall control ROM version 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 9 Description Items Adjusting values 25 mode Values to be selected for respective adjustment items 25 mode software SW setting Default values and current setting value of each SW Adjustment list page 3 Management list Adjusting values 25 mode Software SW settings Number of page diust 25 oo000000000000000000000 Key operator password set E K C master key code set lv timer master key set Service elehna number Item number Copy nunber Host I nunber Host2 eooo0000000000000000 0 0 ooooooooooooooooocooo oo Default Bit Bit 8145 Bit4 Bitl 8140 eooo0o000000000 00000 000 gt o oooooooooooo oooo ocoo ooooooooooooooooo ooooo Management list o oooocooooooo oooooocoo ooooooooooo ocooooooooooo oooooooooooooooocooo oc o 38888888888 Bit Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit2 Bitl Bitd HEX
228. law SD 29 SD1 Opics 2 way drive motor 31 M2 Poligori 32 1 RAET rotation M5 2 Wait Optics Laser PWM 36 Output hg code specified value as reading LD alarm measurement 37 Platen stationary APS 39 47 ADJUSTMENT Inhabit to set change to Classification Name Code Multi code Symbol mE write in the filed Conveyance motor 40 1 Drum motor 41 M4 1 Main body cooling fan low speed 2 Main body cooling fan high Fan motor 42 speed 3 Conveyance suction fan FM4 Main body 4 Polygon fan FM6 5 Scanner cooling fan FM2 Total counter 43 C T 1 Main heater L2 Fixing heater lamp 45 2 Sub heater L3 Opration panel light 48 All LEDs on Developing motor 50 M3 MC2 PCL 51 PCL PSL 52 TSL Agitation motor 53 M3 Toner auto supply 54 11 Toner supply motor 55 M11 Adjust by the 36 mode Intrinsic Developing MC 56 MC2 function Toner level detect power 57 TLD source Toner cartridge 58 M10 1 for scanner DCPS1 24 V power source remote 59 for printer 1 Original feed motor forward rotation 224 M302 2 Original feed motor reverse rotation 3 Original conveyance motor forward rotation Xe M301 RADF Load output 60 4 Original conveyance motor reverse rotation 5 Original pick up CL CL301 6 Original feed CL CL302 7 Flapper SD SD301
229. lay board control LCD display operation The LCD is driven by 4 bit parallel data that is input from the CB control board via the OB operation board Backlight ON operation The LCD has backlight cold cathode tube to facilitate viewing The backlight is driven by the OB INVB OB inverter and controlled by OB Touch switch control The LCD has touch switches enabling you to directly select items indicated by the display These touch switches are controlled by OB SW2 sub power control If SW2 is turned ON while SW1 main power is ON power is supplied to each load If SW1 is OFF this switch does not function 2 N 6 2 Signals a Input signals 1 2 3 OP RXD OB to CB Serial data which informs CB of the operation status of OB OP CTS OB to CB Signal which indicates that data is being sent from OB to CB When this signal is H CB stops sending the OB TXD signal SUB SW SW2 to OB This signal becomes L when the SW2 is turned ON b Output signals 1 2 OP TXD CB to OB Serial data which informs OB of the operation status of the machine that is known to CB OP RTS CB to OB Signal which indicates that data is being sent from CB to OB When this signal is H OB stops sending the OB RXD signal 5 Counter Control OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL This machine contains the following counters C T total counter key counter These counters are
230. lection used when APS is set OFF from key operator mode Priority tray when APS is released Mode 8 4 8 5 8 6 No priority 0 0 0 Tray 1 Main body 0 1 0 DB upper tray 1 1 0 DB middle tray 0 0 1 DB lower tray 1 0 1 22 Data Collecting Mode 25 If this bit is set to 1 Yes then all 25 mode collected data 1 to 4 can be checked If the setting is 0 then only collected data 1 is available for checking 25 ADJUSTMENT 23 Copy quantity limit Mode 9 0 9 1 9 2 9 3 No limit 0 0 0 0 1 sheet 1 0 0 0 3 sheets 0 1 0 0 5 sheets 1 1 0 0 9 sheets 0 0 1 0 10 sheets 1 0 1 0 20 sheets 0 1 1 0 30 sheets 1 1 1 0 50 sheets 0 0 0 1 99 sheets 1 0 0 1 24 P81 messages Messages displayed on machines 26 F E screen switchover except for F34 F35 F36 If this bit is set to 1 No all cases except for fixing errors will simply show message instructing user to turn the SW2 sub power OFF and ON If set to 0 all errors will be indicated by error codes 27 Changing the non image area erase threshold value Mode 13 6 13 7 Dark original mode 0 0 Ordinary original 1 0 External light mis detection prevention 0 1 None 1 1 28 Operation if stapling is not possible large size Sizes other than Postcard 5 5x8 5R installed in convenience stores and 50 nonstan
231. ler 13LP 498 200 000 Tray 3 Paper exit drive roller 13LP 498 200 000 Staple unit front 120H5040 500 000 120H5040 500 000 Staple unit rear Note Regarding usage frequency 1 staple of the 3 sheets sort is the condition for assuming main body count 1 5 million resistance when using the system SERVICE COPY MATERIALS 1 PM Parts Kit Composition 1 Composition 100 000 copies kit Name Quantity Name Quantity Cleaning blade 1 Cleaner mount assembly 1 Charging wire cleaning block 1 Fixing cleaning roller 1 Charging wire cleaning block D 1 Fixing cleaning pad 1 Charging corona wire 1 Fixing roller 1 T d Charging wire Transfer Separation corona 2 Charging control plate P d Toner filter Note I 4 10 Note Unnecessary in the case of the 7045 Name Quantity Cleaning pad 10 sheets x 3 Vanity bag for collection Dust bag rubber band 4 Developer collecting sheet rubber band Cotton tips 4 pcs SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE MATERIALS LIST Material No Description Shape Remark 000V 16 0 Drum cleaner 200 ml 000V 17 0 Roller cleaner 200 ml 000800020 Plus guard No 2 250 00GR00170 Multi oil 200 000V 19 0 Setting powder 259 000V 18 1 Cleaning pad 10 pcs 1
232. ll also be displayed Press the RETURN key to end this screen and return to the 25 mode screen 11 KRDS Setting Refer to the chapter KRDS 12 ISW Setting Refer to the chapter ISW 1 81 13 Root Counter Display The root counter total counter can be checked in 25 mode on the root counter display Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 12 Root counter 3 Root counter screen Values of the root counter total counter are displayed 4 Press the RETURN key to return to the 25 mode screen 14 Setting Date Set the total count start day Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 13 Setting date key 3 Setting date screen Using the numeric keys enter the year month and day in that sequence 4 Press the key to return to the 25 mode screen Caution If you press the key without pressing the key the set date remains unchanged and the 25 mode menu screen re appears 36 ADJUSTMENT 36 MODE lt List of adjustment items for 36 mode gt adjustment Restart timing adjustment Main body Restart timing adjustment DB upper tray Restart timing adjustment DB middle tray Restart timing adjustment DB lower tray Restart timing adjustment By pass Restar
233. lly stops after reaching the 25th set and displays message instructing the user to remove the paper and press the START button 4 Toner replenish stop timing When the TLD toner level detector detects that the toner out condition has persisted for a fixed length of time the copier waits an additional number of copies as specified by SW4 0 4 1 and then displays message Please supply toner The toner low condition Toner level detect message requesting new toner Mode 4 0 4 1 After 100 effective copies 0 0 After 1000 effective copies 1 0 After 2000 effective copies 0 1 After 3000 effective copies 1 1 Following the message display the copier allows print ing of an additional number of copies as set by SW4 2 4 3 and will then disable copying Number of copies to copy disable following mes sage for new toner Mode 4 2 4 3 After almost 0 copy 0 0 After almost 1000 copies 1 0 After almost 2000 copies 0 1 After almost 3000 copies 1 1 5 6 Vi 8 However that the copier will stop only if SW4 5 Job stop or nonstop at no toner is set to 1 Thetoner low toner out condition is cleared by inser tion of a new toner bottle toner bottle detect sensor OFF ON The toner out stop conditions vary according to the settings of SW3 2 and SW2 0 1 shot message display at automatic staple mode cle
234. m 4 3 E 2 3 Removing and Reinstalling the Separation Claws 3 E 4 CORONA UNIT SECTION 3 F 1 1 Removing Reinstalling the Charging Corona Unit and PCL 3 F 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer and Separation Corona Unit 3 F 1 3 Removing and Reinstalling the Charging the Control Plate 3 F 2 4 Replacing the Charging Wire 3 F 3 5 Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wires 3 F 3 6 Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaning Block and D 3 F 4 DEVELOPING 400 000 3 G 1 1 Screws That Must Not Be Removed 3 G 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Developing 3 G 1 3 Replacing the Developer 3 G 2 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3 H 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Toner Cartridge 3 H 1 CLEANING TONER RECYCLE UNIT 3 I 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Cleaning Blade 3 I 1 PAPER FEED UNIT ete 3 J 1 1 Removing and Reinstalling the By pass Paper Feed Unit 3 J 1 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Paper Feed 3 J 1 3 Replacing the By pass Paper Feed Rubber
235. me period corresponding to the image data This laser light is applied to the drum MPC Maximum Power Control The ICB instructs the LDB to cause the laser to output the maximum power output value thus setting the maximum output value The LDB stores this setting and maintains the laser light intensity stored by means of the APC Automatic Power Control operation MPC timing When SW is turned ON APC Automatic Power Control The ICB outputs an APC start instruction to the LDB at the following timing after MPC is set APC timing When PLL lock of M5 polygon is detected After PLL lock is detected the LDB automatically monitors the laser drive current one line at a time and controls it so that the light intensity remains the MPC value Write Timing In this machine the INX signal from INDEXSB determines the laser write start timing for each scan in the axial direction of the drum WRITE UNIT Signals Input signals INX INDEXSB to CB to ICB Write system index signal IDPR INDEXSB to CB to ICB 5 VDC power monitoring signal for INDEXSB index sensor board ALM LDB to CB to ICB Signal which indicates an abnormality in the laser drive current APC operation L Abnormal H Normal Output signals VIDEO ICB to CB to LDB Laser image data signal DA CLK ICB to CB to LDB Data transfer clock signal for MPC setting value DI ICB to CB to LDB Data signal of MPC setting value LD
236. ming adj screen Press the 1 Drum clock adj key Press the 1 Drum clock adj key 4 Drum clock adj screen 4 Drum clock adj screen Press the key until Horizontal adj platen Press the NEXT key until RADF appears in the appears in the message display area message display area 5 Press the COPY key 5 Press the COPY key 6 Basic screen 6 Basic screen Set the new pyramid chart on the original glass Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper Then press select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper Then press the the start button to make start button to make copy 7 Measure the vertical magnification of the output paper 7 Measure the vertical magnification of the output paper Standard value 0 5 or less life size Standard value 0 1 or less life size Within 1 mm with respect to 200 mm Within 2 0 mm with respect to 200 mm 8 Press the C button while pressing the P button to 8 Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the Drum clock adj screen return to the Drum clock adj screen 9 Drum clock adj screen 9 Drum clock adj screen If the vertical magnification is different from the standard If the vertical magnification is different from the standard value enter value from the numeric keys then press value enter value from the numeric keys then press the SET to store the adjustment value the key to store the adjustment value
237. ms If there is an abnormality in the test pattern it means that there is an abnormality in either the ICB image control board or the write system Reference This test pattern is output as 8 bits Test Pattern 36 ADJUSTMENT No 81 Copy y GA built in pattern Check Items If No 80 SGU GA built in pattern is normal and No 81 copy y GA built in pattern is abnormal it means that there is an abnormality in either the CB control board or the ICB image control board Reference This test pattern is output as 8 bits Test Pattern 1 54 ADJUSTMENT No 84 Read GA built in pattern Check Items If No 80 SGU GA built in pattern and No 81 copy y GA built in pattern are normal but No 84 read GA built in pattern is abnormal it means that there is an abnormality in the ICB image control board If there is an image abnormality despite the fact that No 80 81 and 84 are normal it means that there is an abnormality in either the CCD sensor board or the CB control board Reference This test pattern is output as 8 bits Test Pattern 36 ADJUSTMENT 6 Density Adjustment Density of respective patterns is adjusted in the following procedure Select the Density adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the print density adjustment screen will appear Density adjustment menu 1 Print density adjustment 1 Test patter
238. n 1 42 Paper feed loop amount adjustment If a paper is skewed adjust the amount of the loop for each tray Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the timing adjustment menu screen will appear Select the 3 Paper loop adj on this screen then the paper feed loop amount adjustment screen will appear This adjustment has the following kinds of items These can be selected by pressing the or BACK key Paper feed loop adjustment All Paper feed loop adjustment ADU small size Note 1 Paper feed loop adjustment ADU large size Note 2 Paper feed loop adjustment Main body tray small size Note 3 e Paper feed loop adjustment Main body tray large size Note 4 Paper feed loop adjustment DB Paper feed loop adjustment By pass ordinary paper Paper feed loop adjustment By pass thick paper Paper feed loop adjustment ADU Paper feed loop adjustment FCOT Note 5 Paper feed loop adjustment face side Paper feed loop adjustment RADF back side Note 1 Note 2 B5 only Other than B5 Note 3 Other than FAR B4 8 5x14 11x17 Note 4 F4R A3 B4 8 5x14 11x17 Note 5 Only the first of the A4 8 5x11 size copies exited from tray 1 at the manual density and 1 1 magnification settings 36 ADJUSTMENT a Paper feed loop adjustment for engine b Paper feed loop adjustment for RADF
239. n SGU out Error Code Cause Condition 0001 Drum reflective Amount of reflective light from drum light insufficient does not meet standard even after modi fying Dmax sensor LED light amount 0002 Developer perform Patch density does not meet standard ance insufficient even when developer rotation is maximum 0003 Patch detection Patch on drum cannot be detected defective 0004 Drum reflective Amount of reflective light from drum light excessive detected by Dmax sensoris too much 0005 Dmax sensor out Dmax sensor output can hardly be put abnormality detected 0008 Data precision de Toomanydiscrepancies in data for proof fective ing by calculation the relationship of the value read by the Dmax sensor patch and the scanner patch density and the precision of the calculation is defective 0400 Insufficient data Patch data numbers read by scan numbers read ner is less than what is required in the above calculation 0800 Insufficient grada Patch level numbers read by scan tion numbers read ner is less than what is required the above calculation 1000 Dmax sensor de The density of the patch read by the tection value error Dmax sensor is almost the same for the lowest and highest density and so the above calculation could not be done 0008 Data precisionde The data for calculating the PWM fective correction curve from the value read by Dmax sensor patch has too many discrepancies and the precision of t
240. n density adjustment Adjustment of the density of the test pattern Select the 5 Density Adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the print density adjustment screen will appear Select the 1 Print density adj 1 in the print density adjustment screen then the print density adjustment screen will appear Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 5 Density adj 3 Density adj screen Press the 1 Print density adj 1 4 Print density adj 1 screen Press the key according to the desired test pattern to be adjusted 5 Enter a desired density by numeric value from the numeric keys then press the SET key Input range 000 light to 255 dark 6 Press COPY 7 Basic screen Press the start button to output a test pattern 8 Check the density of the output test pattern 9 Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the density adj screen 10 To adjust another test pattern repeat steps 4 to 9 11 Press the RETURN key to return to density adj screen 1 56 7 Image Quality Adjustment This function adjusts the image quality adjustment 1 Select the 6 Image quality adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the image quality adjustment screen will appear Image quality adjustment menu 1 PWM gamma Patch 2 RADF scanner de
241. n press the key to set the entered password The screen will return to the KRDS setting menu screen As the host password is set to 00000 in factory setting ensure to change it to the password which was set by the KRDS host application for communication Confirm the password of host side with KRDS host application administrator Note that the host password setting Host 1 must be performed See the 4 Calling time set menu mode Arbitrary concerning Host 2 settings Do not care Host 3 3 10 Step Operation procedure Enter the 25 mode 25 mode menu screen Press the 10 KRDS setting key KRDS setting screen Press the 2 Host password set key Host password setting screen Enter password consisting of number and alphabet Press the NEXT BACK key to change the screen then enter password up to 2 patterns Press the SET key Press the RETURN to end the setting KRDS 7 Setting the KRDS telephone number This function sets copier for KRDS and host telephone number 1 Screen selection Select the 10 KRDS setting key in the 25 mode menu screen to display the KRDS setting screen as an initial screen Then select the 3 KRDS TEL No setting key to display the KRDS TEL No setting screen Setting method a Three patterns can be used to set KRDS phone number The entry screen screen contents and
242. n signal at the paper exit section This signal becomes H when paper is detected PS SIG 528 to PRDB Paper passage detection signal at the reversal roller section This signal becomes L when paper is detected 529 SIG PS29 to PRDB Paper passage detection signal at the fixing exit section This signal becomes H when paper is detected PS SIG PS30 to PRDB Paper passage detection signal at the paper exit reversal roller section This signal becomes L when paper is detected Output signals A B B PRDB to M12 M12 reversal paper exit ON OFF drive signal oy 505 DRIVE PRDB to 505 SD5 gate drive control signal L SD5 ON H SD5 OFF 2 L 4 ADU SECTION ADU SECTION 1 Composition Conveyance guide plate upper Ci Conveyance rollers A Conveyance rollers AN gt 57 EG b t 5 I 47277 rollers B Registration roller ADU no feed PS 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Paper feed 1 Non stack selection Paper conveyance Conveyance roller three Registration roller Conveyance drive Gear Timing belt Jam clearance 2 om Conveyance roller The drive from the ADU paper feed Opening closing of conveyance guide plate upper en
243. n the start button is on MC1 close it 2 registration does not turn on within the certain time RADF J61 0 MS301 cover open close detect is OFF RADF is stopped Open the RADF and white the RADF is operating immediately remove the jammed J61 1 PS301 DF open close detect was If there is paper during or paper and close it turned OFF during RADF operation after transfer the main J62 0 5306 original registration is not body is stopped after exit turned ON within a certain period after of the paper the original feed has been started J62 1 5306 original registration is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J62 2 PS308 original feed detect is not turned ON within certain period after the pre feed of the duplex original front side include the simplex original has been started J62 3 5308 original feed detect is not turned ON within certain period after the pre feed of the duplex original back side has been started J62 4 5308 original feed detect is not JAM ERROR CODES Classifica tion Jam code Causes Operation when jam OCCUIS Jam clearing method RADF RADF J62 5 PS308 original feed detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after the scanning of the duplex original back side has been started J63 0 PS307 original exit detect is not turned ON within a certain period after the scanning of the simplex origi
244. n this screen Password setting menu 1 Key operator password set 2 E K C master key code set 3 Weekly timer master key set 1 Setting key operator password This function sets the password to enter the key operator mode Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 6 Password setting 3 Password setting screen Press the 1 Key operator password set key 4 Key Operator Password Set Screen Enter 4 digit new password from the numeric keys 5 Press the key to set the password that has been entered 6 Press the RETURNI key to return to the password setting screen Caution When pressing the key without pressing the key the setting is complete However the new password will not be entered and the password setting menu screen will return Reference When setting password to 0000 the key operator mode can be used without password 1 28 2 Setting of EKC master key code Set the master key code when entering the EKC setting mode of the key operator mode Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 6 Password setting Password setting screen Press the 2 master key code set key EKC master key code set screen Enter 8 digit new master key code using the numeric keys Press the SET
245. n unit While pressing the shaft remove the double feed prevention unit from the paper unit 3 Double feed prevention unit Double feed pressure spring Shaft 4 Remove the stop ring then pull out the lever click shaft while pushing the lever of the shaft and remove the double feed prevention roller Double feed prevention roller Stop ring Lever click shaft N Double feed prevention unit 5 Reinstall the double feed prevention roller in the oppo site sequence to removal Caution After reinstallation check that the double feed pressure spring smoothly moves the double feed prevention roller 3 J 5 PAPER FEED UNIT 8 Removing and Reinstalling the 2nd Paper Feed Unit NCaution Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet a 1 2 Removal procedure Remove the rear cover Refer to External section Remove the three set screws then remove the two flywheels Caution When installing the flywheel be careful of the direction of the stamped mark Install the flywheel in such a way that the mark on the first faces the main body side and the mark on the second faces the rear oN De TARN UN L U oh Set screws Flywheels 3 Disconnect the three connectors CN66 CN3 C
246. nal has been started J63 1 PS307 original exit detect is not turned ON within a certain period after the scanning of the duplex original back side has been started J63 2 At the simplex original is exited PS307 original exit detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J63 3 Operating At the duplex original is exited P5307 original exit detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J63 4 PS309 original reverse detect is not turned ON within a certain period after the scanning of the duplex original front side has been started J63 5 PS309 original reverse detect is not turned ON within a certain period after the reverse feed has been started J63 6 At the start of the duplex original front side scanning PS309 original reverse detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J63 7 At the start of the reverse feed PS309 original reverse detect is not turned OFF within a certain period after it has been turned ON J65 1 PS306 original registration is ON during idling J65 2 PS308 original feed detect is ON during idling J65 4 Stationary PS309 original reverse detect is ON during idling J65 8 PS307 original exit detect is ON during idling RADF is stopped immedi ately If there is paper during or after transfer
247. nce to removal Caution When installing the charging control springs be careful of the attachment direction Charging control spring MU clin Charging control spring CORONA UNIT SECTION 4 1 S I I ID I TI Replacing the Charging Wire Procedure Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section Remove the charging corona unit Remove the charging control plate Remove the charging cover front and rear each Remove the charging wire cleaning block Remove the charging wire cleaning block D Remove the one spring then remove the charging wire Charging cover rear Charging wire cleaning block C Charging cover front Charging wire cleaning block D Charging wires 8 Reinstall the charging wire in the opposite sequence to removal 3 F 3 5 Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wires a Procedure 1 Remove the transfer and separation corona unit from the main body 2 While lifting the transfer entrance plate remove the two springs 3 Remove the one set screw then remove the transfer entrance plate Transfer entrance plate Set screw 4 Remove the five hooks from the transfer and separation corona unit with tweezers then remove the plunging prevention plate Plun
248. nd 526 consist of LEDs and photosensors APS detection takes place as a result of the light emitted from each LED being reflected off the original and received by the photosensor PS25 O eJ 526 De Paper exit side Photosensor O LED The relation between each sensor and the paper size is shown below 2 C 6 SUE PS302 PS303 PS25 PS26 Paper size A3 B4 A4R B5R x x A4 x x B5 x x O Paper is detected ON X Paper is not detected OFF APS detection timing The APS detection timing differs depending upon whether the platen mode or the DF mode is used During a DF copy operation When either the DF mode is selected or an original is placed in the RADF paper feed tray the original size is detected by PS302 original size detect 1 PS303 original size detect 2 and VR301 original size detect During a platen copy operation When PS4 APS timing is ON and PS301 is ON If RADF is open the original size is detected when the Start button is pressed Signals Input signals HOME PS3 to SCDB to ICB Exposure unit home position detection signal L Exposure unit is in the home position H Exposure unit is not in the home position APS TIMING 54 to SCDB to ICB RADF opening closing detection signal Activates or deactivates the APS function at a platen copy operation L OFF APS function deactivated H ON APS
249. ng the drum perform this operation to reset the copy count of drum 1 79 Step Operation procedure Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode menu screen 2 47 mode menu screen Press 9 3 by means of the numeric keys Press 9 1 by means of the numeric keys Check that 093 000 appears in the message Check that 091 000 appears in the message display area display area 3 Press the start button 3 Press the P button The message display column NOW display 4 Press 1 by means of the numeric keys changes to FIN and resets and ends Check that 091 001 appears in the message 4 Toend the setting press the stop clear button display area 5 Toend the 47 mode turn off the SW2 sub power 5 Press the start button The message display column NOW display changes to FIN and resets and ends 6 Toend the setting press the stop clear button 7 Toend the 47 mode turn off the SW2 sub power 4 RADF Original Size Detection Adjustment Perform this adjustment when the RADF original size detection does not operate properly or when replacing the DFCB RADF control board Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode menu screen Press 6 9 by means of the numeric keys Check that 069 000 appears in the message display area 3 Set the ABR size ori
250. nit mounting pieces front and rear with the four set screws Remove the optics position adjusting jigs and install the operation panel The reminder of the installation procedure is in the opposite sequence to removal 3 C 7 READ SEGTION 5 Removing the Optics Wire Caution Be sure to perform image quality adjustment after replacing or re installing the wire For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service Procedure Remove the exposure unit Remove the operation panel Move the V mirror unit to the paper exit side then insert the optics position adjusting jig into the V mirror unit mounting position from the front At this time pass through the optics position adjusting jig into the V mirror unit and fasten the V mirror unit SBS V mirror unit Paper exit side Optics position adjusting jig READ SEGTION Removethe rear cover then free the wiring from the two cord clamps on the rear side of the scanner drive board SCDB Remove the five connectors CN20 to CN24 and the three set screws from the scanner drive board Pull out the scanner drive board and disconnect the connector CN11 on the image control board then remove the scanner drive board Caution Be careful not to drop screws etc between the boards at the rear of the main body Connector CN11 Scanner drive board Connector A Connector CN24 Connector
251. no feed is ON during idling The main body are stoped Open the main body 481 PS16 registration is ON during idling immediately conveyance door DB ance J82 5401 paper feed detect is ON during conveyance door or idling front door and remove the jammed paper and 5 close it 2 Fixing 490 PS29 fixing exit is ON during idling Open the exit door Q Paper exit J91 PS1 paper exit is ON during idling and remove the 2 ADU J92 PS28 reverse detect 1 is ON during jammed paper and idling close it 8 J93 PS30 reverse detect 2 is ON during idling 5 J97 1 5501 ADU feed is not turned within a certain period after M501 ADU 5 paper feed has been turned O J100 5502 ADU registration is ON during 5 idling 5 a ERROR CODE LIST JAM ERROR CODES Classifica Warn C Operation in case of auses Estimated abnormal parts tion ing code warning occurrence Communica F10 1 Serialcommunication betweenthe The machine stops immedi PRDB printer drive board tion PRDB printer drive board and ately and main relay and ICB image control board abnormality ICB image control board is dis 24VDC are turned OFF SCDB scanner drive board continued F10 2 The answer to the A D PRDB printer drive board conversion is not replied two times consecutively F10 3 DB communication abnormality ICB image contr
252. nsity adjustment 3 Non image area erase check 2 Press the key according to the item to be adjusted The selected adjustment screen will appear 3 Specity value to adjust on the adjustment screen 4 Toendthe adjustment press the RETURN key to the density adjustment screen 1 Patch method PWM gamma correction Preform PWM gamma correction Dmax sensor correction by reading SGU test pattern Note1 2 Perform the following four adjustment items in the order a b c and d a Dmax Dmax correction Setting the darkest density b SGU SGU pattern print Output a SGU pattern No 50 No 51 to use with the gamma correction c Gamma correction Read the output pattern by the scanner of the copier with the b SGU pattern print and calculate the correction value from the PWM value when pattern has been output and read pattern density d Gamma curve preparation Based on the correction value obtained in the gamma correction and the patch read level calculate the correction value of the Dmax sensor and create the gamma curve Note1 If this calibration is not completed cor rectly the density reproducibility of the printer IP 431 may deteriorate Note2 When performing this operation close the side plate at the side of the main body and the rear cover 36 ADJUSTMENT a Dmax correction Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen
253. nt list P 2 omg Overall control ROM ROM Ver AS version code count gt Service calls by F code sem rim Te e n fre 8 002 3 003 88 cos IET BBEEREESPSERESSES Fm AE E E EE EEE 2 8 5 1 7 1 JAM code count 4 1 022 05 10 9 61 01 2 028 2 02 eal 62 05 094 p 63 02 M 097 m 453 05 040 72 10 4 043 3 1 32 13 m 046 2 42 16 049 b 1 69 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 3 Description Items Latest SC F E code history List information about the last 50 service calls F E For each call indicates the following date and time of occurrence error code total copy count and ROM version Management list Number of page Management list 05 09 2009 0 64 Overall control ROM E5YF0008 iu iS version Latest SC history gt of se p 555 EEE EE 55 40 AD 20 AD AQ 0 AQ 0 40 40 40 AQ AQ b AD 40 60 60 1 70 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 4 Description Items Latest JAM history The latest 100 jams are listed with the information on the date occurred respective JAM codes total copy count and t
254. o Read section 8 Pulloutthe scanner drive board into the rear side of the machine and disconnect the connector CN11 on the image control board from the scanner drive board 9 Remove the two set screws and pull out the image control board Connector CN13 Connector Connector CN12 CN11 Image control board Set screw 3 D 2 10 Remove the five set screws then remove the printer side cover Printer side cover Set screws Set screws 11 Disconnect the seven connectors CN1 CN2 CN5 CN6 CN7 CN200 CN505 and free the wiring from the six cord clamps 12 Remove the nine set screws then remove the board stay assembly Connector Connector CN7 CN200 Connector Cord Connector CN1 05 Connector CN5 Set screws Connector CN2 Set screws Connector CN6 Board stay assembly Set screws WRITE UNIT 13 Disconnect the connector CN44 14 Remove the four set screws then remove the write unit Write unit Connector CN44 Set screws Set screws 15 Reinstall the write unit in the opposite sequence to removal 3 D 3 2 Cleaning the Dust proof Glass Procedure Remove the drum unit Refer to Drum unit Reach inside the main body and using soft cloth wipe the dirt from the dust proof glass Dust proof glass
255. o eR ERSEKXRHEREKRSZSISMEGSSSS software DIP SW setting gt is software 9 set 1 77 47 ADJUSTMENT 47 MODE 1 47 Mode Setting Method 1 47 mode This mode provides self diagnostic functions input output check function to check and adjust the various signals and loads Also 47 mode has multi mode it is possible to check the multiple input output using one input output check code 2 Operation method To start 47 mode 1 47 mode startup a Turn OFF the SW2 sub power when the SW1 main power remains ON b Turn the SW sub power back on while holding down 4and7 ofthe numeric keys 47 mode screen will appear on the LCD screen This is the 47 mode which the normal copy operation becomes disable 47 mode menu screen 0 CHECK MODE 47 mode message display area CHECK MODE lt 000 000 gt 0000 OUT Input check Multi code Output check Input Output check code 2 a Using the copy numeric keys enter the code input for the desired signal sensor etc to check b When using the multi mode press P button and enter the multi code according to the desired input check item signal with the copy quantity setting button Input check method 1 78 Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode menu screen Using the numeric keys enter the input check code Note1 3 When using the multi mode press
256. o end the 47 mode turn the SW2 sub power OFF 1 80 6 RADF Sensor Adjustment Perform this adjustment when replacing the DFCB RADF control board Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode menu screen Press 6 9 P 2 by means of the numeric keys Check that 069 002 appears in the message display area 3 Press the start button 4 Toend the setting press the stop clear button 5 To end the 47 mode turn off the SW2 sub power 7 Input Check code List ADJUSTMENT ificati N Cod i Symbol S Classification ame ode Multi code ON Drum temperature signal 00 Toner control data 0 01 PRDB Toner control data 1 02 PRDB Fixing temperature sensor 0 03 TH1 Analog Fixing temperature sensor 1 04 TH2 signal Analog value 0 to 255 L detection signal 05 Humidity sensor signal 06 HUM1 By pass papai size 07 VRI detection signal 1 Main body tray PS31 2 DB upper 5402 No paper detection signal 10 3 DB middle PS404 Paper No paper 4 DB lower only for DB 208 is installedj 5406 5 By pass PS13 1 Main body tray 532 Tray upper limit detection 2 Upper limit Upper limit signal 3 DB middle ae 4 DB lower only for DB 208 is installed 5407 Paper feed 5 By pass EE
257. ock adj on this screen then the Drum clock adjustment magnification adjustment screen will appear This adjustment has the following items These can be selected by pressing the NEXT or BACK key Vertical magnification drum clock adjustment Printer Vertical magnification drum clock adjustment Platen Horizontal magnification adjustment Platen Vertical magnification adjustment RADF 50 Vertical magnification adjustment RADF 100 Vertical magnification adjustment RADF 20096 Vertical magnification adjustment RADF 40096 Enter data from the numeric keys on the screen then press the key to enter the data that have been entered Press the key to return to the basic screen then make a test copy While pressing the P button press the C buttonto return to the magnification adjustment screen If the output test copy image is different from the standard value enter setting value using the numeric keys and make a test copy If the output test copy image is within the standard value adjust the next adjustment item 36 ADJUSTMENT a Printer system vertical magnification adjustment b Platen vertical magnification adjustment Step Operation procedure Step Operation procedure 1
258. odifications Not Authorized by Konica Konica copiers are renowned for their high reliability This reliability is achieved through high quality design and solid service network Photocopier design is highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical physical and electri cal aspects have to be taken into consideration with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors For this reason unauthorized modifications involve high risk of degrading performance and safety Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited The points listed below are not exhaustive but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy PROHIBITED ACTIONS 1 Using extension cables or different power cord than specified by Konica Using other fuses than specified by Konica Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Disabling fuses or bridging fuse terminals with wire metal clips solder or similar This applies also to thermal fuses Removing air filters except for replacement Disabling relay functions such as wedging paper between relay contacts etc Disabling safety functions interlocks safety cir cuits etc Safety will not be assured leading to a risk of fire and injury Performing actions to copier not described in the instruction manual or the service handbook 8 Using parts other than specified by Konica 2 7 2 Checkpoints When Performing
259. off the power to end the operation How to confirm the completion of setup Confirm the data at bit No 0 of address 33 in reference to 4 Setting KRDS software SW If 0 setup is not completed If 1 setup is completed Manual set up This copier machine can be set up manually other than the automatical setup as explained above The setup is effective when both the copier and the host have completed the setup action Operation for the copier machine 1 Switch on the power of modem 2 Set the address No 33 as referring to 4 Setting KRDS software SW 3 Change the data of bit No 0 from 0 to 1 0 Set up not completed 1 Set up completed 4 Establish the changed data by pressing the copy button 5 Switch off the power of main body Operation for the host computer For the operation of the host compouter refer to the KRDS Host Application Administrator s Manual 3 12 KRDS 4 Calling Time Set Menu Mode Arbitrary Select the 10 KRDS setting key in the 25 mode menu screen to display the KRDS setting screen as an initial screen Then select the 1 Calling time set key to display the calling time set screen Calling time set menu 1 Calling mode 1 2 Calling mode 2 3 Calling mode 3 Press the key to exit the calling time set screen and return to the KRDS setting screen This host calling setting calls everything to the
260. ol board signal is detected SCDB scanner drive board PFDB paper feed detect board Paper feed F18 2 PS32 upper limit on the PFDB PRDB printer drive board lifting paper feed detect board is not SCDB scanner drive board abnormality turned ON within 26 seconds PFDB paper feed detect board from ON of 8 tray 8 tray F18 3 5403 upper limit detect M402 up down U upper is not turned ON within M403 up down M 26 seconds from ON of M402 M404 up down L up down upper PS32 upper limit F18 4 P5405 upper limit detect P5403 upper limit detect U middle is not turned ON within 5405 upper limit detect M 26 seconds from ON of M403 5407 upper limit detect L up down middle F18 5 PS407 upper limit detect lower is not turned ON within 26 seconds from ON of M404 up down lower High F28 1 When charging output is judged If a copy being made when PRDB printer drive board voltage to be abnormal discharge an error occurs the machine HV1 high voltage unit 1 power stops immediately after Charging corona unit supply completion of exit of the abnormality copy and main relay and 24VDC are turned OFF F28 2 When transfer output is judged to The machine stops PRDB printer drive board be an abnormal discharge immediately and main relay HV2 high voltage unit 2 and 24VDC are turned OFF Transfer corona unit F28 3 When separation output is PRDB printer drive board
261. on Be sure to coat the set screw of the thermostat with screw lock agent af ter reinstalling the thermostat a Removal procedure 1 Remove the fixing unit from the main body 2 Remove the oil supply unit from the fixing unit 3 Disconnect the two faston terminals connected to the thermostat Remove the one set screw then remove the thermostat Set screw Faston terminal Faston terminal d ollo Thermostat b Reinstallation procedure 1 Set the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig be tween the thermostat TS and the fixing roller upper then fix the thermostat with the set screw so that the clearance between the thermostat and the fixing roller upper is the standard value Faston terminal AK M T lt Fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Thermostat Setthe distance a between the fixing roller upper and the thermostat so that it is equal to the thickness of the fixing temperature sensor positioning jig Thermostat Pb on Fixing roller upper Standard a 0 9 0 15 S Coat the set screw of the thermostat with paint lock agent Connect the two faston terminals The reminder of the installation procedure is in the opposite sequence to removal BG 3 K 9 FIXING UNIT REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION REVERSAL AND PAPER EXIT SECTION 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Reversal and Paper Exit
262. on adjusting jig Fasten each metal bead at the leading edge of the optics wire front and rear to the slits of the main body frame on the paper exit side Slit Slit rear side of the machine front side of the machine Pulley 1 Optics wire rear Optics wire front Round Exposure unit mounting piece rear terminals Gummed tape 51 Ne for provision N x T E aS E rin 4 PN 3 Q 1 Sy Exposure unit E mounting piece ut ey front 54 1 A O Rear side of DJ the machine GN Dig Front side of the machine Bearing 3 C 10 6 Pass the side with the round terminal of the optics wire front to the outside of the pulley 2 and hook the round terminal on the spring retainer Hook the optics wire rear in the same way Install the exposure unit to the main body Loosen each set screw fasting the spring retainers Fasten each set screw of the spring retainers after moving the exposure unit two or three times SBS Exposure unit mounting i piece rear Spring ratainer Pulleys 2 Set screw V mirror unit Exposure unit mounting piece front Spring ratainer front Set screw 10 The reminder of the installation procedureis in the opposite sequence to removal 3 C 11 READ SECTION WRITE UNIT WRITE UNIT 1 Removing and Reinstalling the Write Unit AMWamingt Warning2 A Warnings A Caut
263. on the left side of the V mirror unit pass the driver through the holes for screwdriver on the left side of the main body For image distortion pattern A A Loosen the two set screws on the front side of the V mirror unit left side B After turning the adjustment screw on the front side of the upper surface of the V mirror unit 1 2 turns clockwise tighten the two set screws located on the front side of the left surface C Repeat steps A to B until the image distortion is within specified range 0 396 or less For image distortion pattern B gt A Loosen the two set screws on the rear side of the V mirror unit left side B After turning the adjustment screw on the rear side of the upper surface of the V mirror unit 1 2 turns clockwise tighten the two set screws located on the rear side of the left surface C Repeat steps A to B until the image distortion is within specified range 0 396 or less Using an image distortion pattern move the front original stopper plate one graduation 0 5 mm then adjustthe position of the original adjusting plate front Back Original Transfer sheet stopper direction c 2 Image distortion pattern Front Move one calibration Back Transfer sheet direction ES gt Image distortion pattern Front Move one calibration Original stopper plate front OTHER ADJUSTMENT Step Ope
264. ooooooocoooooooooooooo oo 06 09 2000 10 17 8 554700005 To 1989 ROM Ver 20 Setting Set oocoooooooooooooocooo c o ooocooooooooooo ooooco ooo o oooooooooooo oooo oo oooooooocoooo ooo oooco SSESSSSSBBSSSSSSSSSSSBSES Overall control ROM version 1 76 P 10 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list Description Items KRDS software SW setting Default values and current setting value of each SW Adjustment list page 4 Number of page Management list version 10 05 09 2000 10 1 Mana amp ement list 4 Overall control ROM HEX 2 a S a amp z a g 5 HEX Bit Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit2 Bitd EIB98888888888BSS5SSUBSSU RSRULESSSOUSSSSES o0o0ooooooooocoo o oo ooooo oo oooooo oo ooooooooooooooo oo o oo o ooooo oo ooooooooooocoocoo o oooco ooo oooooo ooooooooooooooooooo oo oo o o o ooooo oo ooooooooooooooo ooo oooo oo oooooo oooooooooooooooooooooooo oo o oooooooooo oo oooooooooooooooooooo o ooo ooo oooooo ooooooooooooooooooooooooooo oooooo oo oo oooooocoocoooocoo o oococ oco oococo ocoococoococoooocoo oc oo o o o oooco oeoooccoooococoocoooocooc oo o ocoooocooo oo ocoooocosoocoooocoao e aoo oco oococo ooooooooooooooooooooooooooo oooooo oo S8888558go sexoc
265. operly grounded 3 Is the machine sharing its power source with another high current consumption machine that draws large currents intermittently e g an elevator air condi tioner or other source of electrical consumption 4 15 the installation environment suitable a The machine must be installed in a well ventilated place free from high temperature high humidity and direct sunlight b The machine must be installed on a level floor 5 Does the cause of a defective image lie in the original itself 6 Is the density adjusting control at the proper position 7 Are the original glass and RADF platen guide clean 8 Is the correct paper being used for the copy 9 Arethe copying materials and parts replaced when they reach the end of their usable life developer drum cleaning blade etc 10 Is there toner in the toner bottle The following items should also be observed when repairing the machine 1 Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when the SW 1 main power of this machine is turned off Always unplug the machine before beginning work If absolutely necessary to work with the power on exercise care to avoid being caught inthe scanning rear of the exposure unit 2 Special care should be taken when handling the fixing unit since it operates at extremely high temperatures 3 The developing unit is surrounded by a strong magnetic field Keep watches and metering equipment away from it 4 Avoid
266. opies in user density mode f feeds in sheet ins amp Thick paper f copies in image insert mode f copies in combination mode Nun of copies in reverse image mode Nun of copies in increase contrast mode Nun of copies in face Up output mode Num of copies from tray Nun of copies from tray8 Nun of staple 1 in FNS Nun of copies in booklet mode Of copies in folded original mode No Nun Of copies in stamp mode Nun Of copies in Overlay mode in 121 magnification in fixed MR of 1 22 1 55 in fixed MR of 0 86 0 77 Num of copies in fixed MR of 0 71 0 50 Management list 05 09 2000 10 17 H 5500605 TC 1987 ROM Ver A9 Num of copies in 2 2 mode RADF Num of copies in 1 2 mode RADF f copies in sort f stapling operations ies in fixed IR of 1 41 2 00 in fixed WR of 1 15 1 29 in fixed MR of 0 82 0 65 in arbitrary zoom in maximun of copies i of copies in bypass feed mode of copies in frame erase mode of copies in 1 1 image shift mode of copies in thick paper mode of feeds in sheet ins Mode of feeds in CHP mode Blark Sheet f times the job memory mode Of copy when the set Q ty is 1 Of copy when the set Q ty is 6 to 10 Of copy when the sheet ins Mode of copies in photo enhance mode of copies in h V zoom mode of copies in proof Copy mode of copies in text enhance mode of copies in mode Copy Sheet in chapter mode in repeat image mode in nonvimage area er
267. or light as far as possible When drum unit drum is out of the machine never fail to cover it with drum cover 2 When replacing drum or cleaning blade refer to item of mounting dis mounting of a cleaning blade for doing replacement work 4 After replacing the drum or the developer refer to the list of adjustment items and carry out the necessary adjustments When maintenance is completed be sure to reset the PM counter 25 mode Inciden tally a development counter is reset auto matically in the course of L detection ad justment When replacing a toner bottle wait until the toner supply message on the operation panel displays before the replacement Caution Turn the main switch off and pull out the power plug with out fail before the work of maintenance SERVICE SERVICE SCHEDULE 1 Service Schedule Number of copies unit 10 000 Classifica Guarantee period 5 years or 1 200 000 copies Service tion times Service item cycles 10 20 30 40 50 60 90 100 110 Maintenance e o o o Oo 11 times Every 100 000 copies or prints wo Periodic check I 5 times Every 200 000 copies or prints Main body MEM Periodic check II 2 e o 2 times Every 400 000 copies or prints Periodic check 10 1 time Every 800 000 copies or prints Maintenance
268. or more during idling E56 04 The CB control board is not CB control borad detected the finisher ready signal ICB image control board 60 seconds or more during idling SCDB scanner drive board FNS E56 05 The CB control board is not CB control borad detected the original size detect ICB image control board signal within a certain period SCDB scanner drive board during the platen copy operation Operation 56 06 Memory access abnormality is CB control borad unit occurred at the start of copy OB operation board abnormality process LCD display board E56 07 Control abnormality is occurred at the panel manager E56 08 Miss matching of the display data 56 09 Display data abnormality E56 10 Operation communication abnormality Control F56 11 The machine type of the software ICB program abnormality version is different from that of the image processing control program RADF F60 1 RADF communication RADF can not be used ICB image control board abnormality abnormality SCDB scanner drive board RADF F60 11 RADF flash ROM abnormality The machine stops DFCB RADF control borad immediately RADF program F67 1 PS306 original registration RADF not be used ICB image control board PS308 original feed detect SCDB scanner drive board PS309 original reverse detect RADF adjustment faulty F67 2 PS304 motor clock detect is not detected clock pulse when M301 original conveyance is tu
269. or printer system When the density is set to 255 black If the density is light locate abnormality in either scanner system or printer system For information about setting the density refer to 6 Test pattern density adjustment below Test Pattern 1 50 ADJUSTMENT No 11 Beam misalignment check Check Items Check the writing system abnormality condition of resolution reproducibility of independence point and so on Test Pattern 36 ADJUSTMENT No 16 Linearity evaluation pattern Check Items Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal Items that can checked include horizontal magnification vartical magnification tilt image and leading edge timing of the printer system If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern the scanner system is defective Test Pattern Edge of pager 31mm 237mm Edge of pager e N E IN V Y i E SA gt 2 N 5 Y 190mm a 1 52 ADJUSTMENT No 80 SGU GA built in pattern Check Ite
270. ossi spring Fixing roller A E d Fixing cleaning 5 bearing Heater mount E ring Marking side plate rear 7 Remove the three set screws then remove the fixing cleaning 4 Move the pressure release lever at the front side to the release position with a pair of pliers gt Pressure release lever 8 Reinstall the above parts the opposite sequence to removal 7 NE Pressure Release 3 K 3 FIXING UNIT 5 Move the pressure release lever at the rear side to the 5 Removing and Reinstalling the release side in the same way Fixing Claw upper Caution 1 When installing the fixing claw upper be careful of the installation orientation Caution 2 The fixing claw upper should be firmly caught in the claw spring a Procedure maus E 7 release 1 Remove the fixing unit from the main body lever 2 Open the paper exit roller unit upper 3 Remove the two set screws then remove the paper exit roller unit upper 2 6 Remove the one fixing gear and C ring on the rear side 7 Remove the C ring on the front side Remove the two heat insulation sleeves front and rear and bearing on the front and rear side 9 Remove the fixing roller upper Set screw Paper exit roller unit upper C r
271. otor HP rear is not M808 alignment rear turned OFF within 250 m seconds from ON of M808 alignment rear F77 7 At the reverse rotation PS816 alignment motor HP rear in not turned ON within 2 seconds from ON of M808 alignment rear F77 8 At the forward rotation PS814 FNSCB FNS control board stapler unit HP is not turned M806 stapler movement OFF within 400 milliseconds from ON of M806 stapler movement F77 9 At the reverse rotation PS814 stapler unit HP is not turned ON within 4 seconds from ON of M806 stapler movement F77 10 PS813 paper exit motor HP is FNSCB FNS control board not turned ON within 1 5 seconds M805 paper exit from ON of M805 paper exit FNS flash F77 11 FNS flash ROM abnormality The machine stops FNSCB FNS control board ROM immediately FNS program abnormality 6 9 JAM ERROR CODES ing is not completed within certain period ately and the all indicator are gone out on operation panel Classifica Warning Causes Operation in case of Estimated abnormal parts tion code warning occurrence FNS F77 21 Stapler HP is not turned ON The machine stops immedi FNSCB FNS control board abnormality within a certain period after M803 ately and main relay and M802 stapler front stapler front is ON 24VDC are turned OFF F77 22 Stapler HP is not tu
272. pad 7 Photo sensors 55208551 Blower brush 8 Paper feed door 55GA 408 o Drum cleaner Cleaning pad By pass unit 1 By pass tray 556 428 6 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 2 Double feed prevention roller e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 540040560 3 Separation roller 54004056 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 4 Paper feed roller 25BA402 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 5 Double feed prevention plate e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 54004235 6 Photo sensor 2 55WA8552 Blower brush 7 Photo sensor 55208551 Blower brush Paper feed 1 Paper feed unit removing unit 2 Paper feed roller 25BA40327 9 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 3 Separation roller 54004056 Drum cleaner Cleaning 4 Double feed prevention roller Drum cleaner Cleaning 54004056 5 Gears Plus guard No 2 6 Paper feed unit installing ADU 1 Registration roller lower e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 2 Conveyance roller 55HA5025 Drum cleaner Cleaning 3 roller 55HA5026 Drum cleaner Cleaning 4 Conveyance roller 55HA5087 Drum cleaner Cleaning 5 Photo sensor 25 8551 Blower brush 6 Photo sensor 55208551 Blower brush Reversal 1 Paper exit reversal roller Drum cleaner Cleaning pad paper exit 2 Reversal roller 40 4825 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad section 3 roller 55GA4806 6 Drum cleaner Cleaning pa
273. plate Back plate and include remov ing and installing Blower brush Cleaning pad 2 55GA2607 Discharging wire Remarks and indicate the following in the classification of implementation 69 indicates items that must always be implemented indicates items for checking whether they have reached the substantial resistance count listed in the fixed replacement part list and judge whether to replace them or not 4 2 SERVICE Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Material used ing Check cation ment Supply Tools used Machine 1 Conveyance unit 55GA4501 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad inside 2 guide plate 55GA4502 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 3 belt 55GA4506 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 2nd paper 1 Registration guide plate B assembly e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad feed unit 55GA 431 2 Registration unit 55GA4301 Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 3 Registration roller lower 55GA4311 e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 4 Registration roller upper 55GA4312 o Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 5 Registration paper feed roller e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 55GA4322 6 Paper conveyance roller 55GA4323 Drum cleaner Cleaning
274. pplied to the paper transfer guide plate L Voltage is applied H Voltage is not applied 2 E 3 CORONA UNIT SECTION 1 Composition CORONA UNIT SECTION lt corona unit gt Charging wire cleaning block Charging control plate Charging wires lt Transfer and separation corona unit gt Spark arrestor plate front Transfer wire Plunging prevention plate Separation wire Spark arrestor plate rear 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Charging Method Scorotron DC negative corona discharge Discharge wire Tungsten 0 06 mm dia gold plated skin path Grid control Stainless steel plate With manual wire cleaner Transfer DC positive corona discharge Discharge wires Tungsten 0 06 mm dia protection by a tough film of oxide Separation AC DC corona discharge Discharge wires Tungsten 0 06 mm dia protection by a tough film of oxide 2 F 1 CORONA UNIT SECTION 3 Charging Control 5VDC CONT LOCK SIG PGND M4 CLK C CONT C SHIFT GSHIFT F C SIG SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC HV1 high voltage unit 1 which controls charging operates by means of control signals from the PRDB printer drive board and outputs a high voltage to the charging wires 1 Operation Charging control goes ON after the specified time from when M4 drum goes ON and goes OFF again after the
275. py OFF timing After the specified time from when SD4 goes ON 1st paper feed operation timing tray 1 1st copy start After the specified time from when the Start button is pressed 2nd copy start After the specified time from when SD2 1st paper feed goes ON for the 1st copy OFF timing After the specified time from when SD2 goes ON 2nd paper feed control MC1 ON timing After the specified time from when V Valid signal goes ON OFF timing After the specified time from when MC1 registration goes ON Signals Input signals PS14 SIG PS14 to PRDB Paper feed door open close detection signal L Door is closed H Door is open PS17 SIG PS17 to PRDB Paper detection signal used for detecting the paper at before registration section L Paper is not detected H Paper is detected Output signals M6 CONT PRDB to M6 M6 1st paper feed drive control signal L M6 ON H M6 OFF M6 H L PRDB to M6 M6 rotational speed switching signal L High speed H Low speed M6 CLK PRDB to M6 Reference clock signal for controlling the speed of M6 SD4 DRIVE PRDB to SD4 04 drive control signal L SD4 ON H SD4 OFF SD2 DRIVE PRDB to PFDB to SD2 SD2 drive control signal L SD2 ON H SD2 OFF 4 Paper Up down Control PAPER FEED UNIT 24VDC M8 DRIVE When paper feed tray is loaded 8 tray goes ON for a certain period raising the bottom plate in the
276. py count by fixed replacement part Count of sarts Fixed Unit nane Development Paper loop unit Bypass unit Heater unit 35 F5 109 Cleaning blade Charging wire Char cont plate MT bas e hlock C harg QL block D Tran sep co wire Fixing roller A Fixing C Fixing roller U Fixing claw U Insulat sleeve Fixing roller L Fixing claw L Fixing filter filter Pickup roller Forward roller ration pad Pickup CL assy Cleaning assy Management list P 6 7 Overall control ROM ROM Ver AG 1 73 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 7 Description Items Count by the copy mode Collecting data 3 Management list Count by the copy 4 mode Number of page L Total by mode Nun of copies in 1 1 mode 2 1 in 1 1 mode RADF in staple sort in group Num of copies in zoom MR func Nun of copies in minimum NR Nun of copies in Num of copies in interrupt mode Num of copies in book copy m Num of copies in fold erase mode Num of copies in red Image shift mode Nun of copies in thin paper mode Num of feeds in mixed original mode Nun Of times the low power mode was used Num Of copy when the set Q ty is 2 to 5 Nun Of when the set Q ty is 11 or more Num of copies in platen memory mode of copies in text rhoto enhance mode f c
277. r level detection piezoelectric device is used as the TLD When the level of toner in the toner supply unit becomes low the supply toner signal is output to the PRDB As result a message is displayed on the LCD display board via the OB operation board b Detection timing The detection timing is as follows When the machine is switched ON When the front door is opened and closed During a copy operation c Toner supply operation to toner supply unit When TLD detects a no toner condition M10 toner supply 1 goes ON and supplies toner d Detection of no toner state in toner cartridge It the no toner state is detected by TLD after M10 has been held ON for a specified period of time the toner cartridge is assumed to be empty 2 H 3 Signals Input signals TONER LEVEL SIG TLD to PRDB When the level of toner in the toner supply unit becomes low this signal becomes L and message is displayed on the LCD connected to OB UNLOCK SIG M10 to PRDB M10 rotational status detection signal This signal becomes L when M10 reaches the set speed Output signals CONT PRDB to M10 M10 drive control signal L M10 ON H M10 OFF CLEANING TONER RECYCLE UNIT CLEANING TONER RECYCLE UNIT 1 Composition Cleaning blade Cleaning blade Toner conveyance screw Toner collection sheet Toner recycle screw 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Drum cl
278. ration procedure Attach the RADF position adjusting jig to the origi nal stopper plate attachment unit 9 Loosen the ADF hinge screw and readjust the RADF position according to the RADF position adjusting jig 10 Remove the RADF position adjusting jig 11 Repeat steps 7 to 11 until the image distortion is within specified range less than 0 3 12 Check that the paper skew for the platen mode is within specified range less than 0 5 If not within specified range move the original adjust ment plate front to adjust the original stopper plate Note Do not move the position of ADF 13 original stopper plate has been adjusted in step 12 check to see that the clearance between the original stopper plate and the RADF platen guide is more than 0 5mm If less than 0 5mm repeat steps 7 to 13 Crearance 0 5mm or more Original stopper late RADF platen guide Specified range Life size magnification within 0 3 96 Variable magnification within 0 5 96 for diagonal line of a square 200 mm A B the difference is within 0 5 96 Er 200 x lt 1 4 mm 1 90 4 Paper Skew Adjustment 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips Six angled wrench Pyramid chart A3 2 Adjusting method Caution Adjust the paper skew on every tray in the paper feed unit Paper feed unit Set screws Fulcrum Double f
279. ray H Paper in tray FIXING UNIT 1 Composition FIXING UNIT Fixing cleaning roller Fixing heater lamp 1 sensor 2 5 Fixing temperature i Paper exit roller unit lower Fixing temperature sensor 1 Thermostat Sy Paper exit roller unit upper Fixing heater lamp 2 Fixing cleaning roller Fixing claw upper Fixing cleaning pad Fixing roller A Fixing paper exit pulley N Fixing paper exit roller lower Fixing roller upper LA Fixing claw lower Fixing roller lower 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Fixing Pressure heat roller Heat source Heater lamp Two upper lamps Cleaning Fixing cleaning roller Fixing cleaning pad Oil apply Fixing roller A silicone oil Upper roller Aluminium PFA coating Lower roller 1 Silicone rubber PFA tube Separation Separation claws 4 upper and 4 lower claws Temperature de tection Upper roller Non contact type thermistor for control Contact type thermistor for abnormality detection Overheating pre vention Non contact type thermostat upper roller Neutralizing Neutralizing brush 1 Pressure release mechanism of the fixing roller lower The pressure release of the fixing roller lower is carried out by fixing and releasing the two rear and front pr
280. ray and paper sizes Management list Number of page Latest JAM history History of 100 jams Date 09 10 11 1 u 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 25 EBBECGSESEREEUTIESOU ESSI BRSSLS SEA SARBNS SARS 8 08 09 8 08 08 08 08 8 08 08 08 8 8 8 p 287 s oat Tr 82 Management list _ 5 pe roe 002 fon 62 02 g 06 09 2000 10 17 lt 55409005 10 1984 ROM Yer A9 gt Size RRERREERREEREERERREGERRERESER I Overall control ROM version 1 71 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 5 Description Items Copy count by arbitrarily replacement parts Count of parts Named Part name part number copy count and limit count of each parts Management list Number of page Copy count of each parts parts to be replaced named arbitrarily Cant of parts Naned Management list 5 05 09 2000 10 17 4 95100005 I Overall control ROM version 1 72 36 ADJUSTMENT Management list P 6 Description Items count by fixed replacement part Count of parts Fixed Part name part number copy count and limit count of each unit Management list Number of page Co
281. rection Toner collection sheet Setting powder Drum 8 Remove the drum support tool from the drum 9 Pull out the drum coupling shaft then fasten it with the lock lever 10 Remove the drum from the drum casing 11 Gently wipe setting powder on the surface of the drum with cleaning pad 12 Apply setting powder to the entire surface of the drum 13 Apply toner to both ends of the cleaning blade edge and setting powder to the middle of the drum 14 Install the drum to the drum casing release the lock lever lock the drum coupling to the drum flange and install the drum support tool to the drum 15 Rotate the drum in the forward direction and check that there is no setting powder falling and curling of the cleaning blade 16 The reminder of the installation procedure is in the opposite sequence to removal DRUM UNIT 3 Removing and Reinstalling the 5 Remove the separation press spring from each of the separation claws Separation Claws 6 While pressing down the separation fulcrum shaft Caution 1 Take care not to damage the drum Rd W9 when removing the separation claws Caution 2 Be careful of the orientation and Separation press spring position of the separation claws when re installing the claws Caution 3 Do not touch the cleaning blade or
282. registration upon the final copy exit TSL goes ON after the specified time from when MC1 registration goes ON and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 going OFF 2 Signals Output signals PCL CONT PRDB to PCL PCL ON OFF control signal L POL ON H PCL OFF TSL DRIVE PRDB to TSL TSL drive control signal L TSL ON H TSL OFF MC1 DRIVE PRDB to MC1 MC1 drive control signal L MC1 ON H MC1 OFF 2 E 2 The separation claws are driven by SD1 separation claw and is controlled by the PRDB 1 Operation SD1 goes ON after the specified time from when MC1 goes ON causing the separation claws to touch the drum in order to help separate the paper from the drum 2 Signals a Output signal SD1 DRIVE PRDB to SD1 01 drive control signal L SD1 ON H SD1 OFF 5 Transfer Entrance Guide Plate Control DRUM UNIT 5VDC CONT LOCK SIG SGND M1 CLK GP CONT SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC A constant voltage is applied to the transfer guide plate in order to prevent toner from adhering to it 1 Operation a ON OFF timing Transfer guide plate control goes ON after the specified time from when the Start button is pressed and goes OFF again after the specified time from PS16 registration goes OFF b Applied voltage 500 VDC Signals Output signals 1 GP CONT PRDB to HV2 Signal for controlling ON OFF of the voltage a
283. rn A Turn the skew adjustment screw counterclockwise For skew pattern Turn the skew adjustment screw clockwise 5 Make a test copy and check the skew 6 Tighten the four hinge securing screws two on both the left and right 7 Make adjustment by repeating step 3 to 6 OTHER ADJUSTMENT 6 RADF Paper Skew Adjustment DF 315 1 Face side of original paper skew adjustment Caution After completing RADF skew adjustment on the previous page perform RADF paper skew adjustment Open close cover K Registration pulley bracket Upwards IN 7 fo Downwards Registration pulley 1 92 Step Operation procedure Make copy in the single sided single sided copy mode then check the skew of the original Either pattern or Image Copy paper feed direction 4 Paper skew pattern A Paper skew pattern Open the open close cover Loosen the set screw and release the registration pulley bracket Move the registration pulley bracket one calibration in the direction below according to the paper skew pattern For skew in pattern A Move the registration pulley bracket downwards direction down with original feed flow For skew in pattern B Move the
284. rned ON F67 3 Writing and reading abnormality of the nonvolatile memory NVRAM F67 4 Other abnormality 6 8 JAM ERROR CODES Classifica Warning Causes Operation in case of Estimated abnormal parts tion code warning occurrence FNS F70 1 FNS communication abnormality The machine stops immedi ICB image control board abnormality ately SCDB scanner drive board FNSCB FNS control board F77 1 PS805 tray upper limit is not The machine stops FNSCB FNS control board turned ON within 8 seconds from immediately and main relay M804 tray up down ON of M804 up down upper and 24VDC are turned OFF MS802 up down upper Or the MS802 up down upper MS803 up down lower is turned OFF F77 2 PS806 tray lower limit detect is not turned ON within 8 seconds from ON of M804 up down upper F77 3 PS801 drum position is not FNSCB FNS control board turned ON within 4 seconds from M807 conveyance drum drive ON of M807 conveyance drum F77 4 At the forward rotation PS815 FNSCB FNS control board alignment motor HP front is M809 alignment front not turned OFF within 250 m seconds from ON of M809 alignment front F77 5 At the reverse rotation PS815 alignment motor HP front in not turned ON within 2 seconds from ON of M809 alignment front F77 6 At the forward rotation PS816 FNSCB FNS control board alignment m
285. rned ON FNSCB FNS control board within certain period after M802 M803 stapler rear stapler rear is ON F77 30 5802 up down upper or FNSCB FNS control board MS803 up down lower is MS802 up down upper turned OFF MS803 up down lower MS804 stapler safety is turned MS804 stapler safety OFF during stapling Nonvolatile 80 1 Function parameter abnormality Copy the factory saved data PRMB parameter memory board memory is detected NVRAM F80 2 Factory saved data abnormality abnormality is detected F80 3 Function parameter and factory saved data abnormality are detected F80 4 Can not accessed to the function parameter F80 5 Can not be accessed to the factory saved data Flash ROM 81 01 The checksum error is detected on The machine stops ICB image control board abnormality the flash ROM on the ICB image immediately ICB program control board 281 02 The machine type of software 15 CB control board differed between CB control ICB image control board board and ICB image control CB system program board ICB program F81 03 Themachine and CB system pro CB control board gram model type do not match CB system program IP 431 F87 02 When SW1 main power 1 on 431 control board abnormality there isnoresponse to initialization CB control board command within 5 minetes F87 03 HDD access abnormality IP 431 control board Image E88 01 Image processin
286. rrection patch method Classification Probable location of Abnormally Dmax Correction Dmax sensor cleaning TCSB Toner control sensor board PRDB Printer drive board Check for problems in patch prepare between charging developing Check to see whether drum coupling Check for problems in patch preparation shaft is properly set between exposure developing TCSB Toner control sensor board PRDB Printer drive board Check drum unit drawer connection TCSB Toner control sensor board PRDB Printer drive board Gamma Correction Ina series of operations errors may Check whether there were any prob Check for abnormalities in SGU out occur even when performing proper operations due to discrepancies in the values read by the machine return to a Dmax correction and repeat 2 3 times lems with operation procedures SGU pattern original setting direc tion size image or the like put patch preparation between charging developer TCSB toner control sensor board reader re lated items Check to see if the drum coupling Check the drawer connection of the Check for problems in the TCSB shaft is properly set drum unit Toner control sensor board patch preparation between the exposure developing Gamma Curve Prepare Ina series of operations errors may Check for abnormalities i
287. s no representations or warranties either ex pressed or implied that the information contained in this Service Handbook is complete or accurate It is understood that the user of this Service Handbook must assume all risks or personal injury and or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Handbook is intended Therefore this Service Handbook must be read carefully before doing service work both in the course of the technical training and even after that for keeping the correct maintenance and control of the copier Keep this Service Handbook also for the future service When it is impossible to read the description about safety and warning due to contamination or tear the relevant page should be replaced DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER WARNING AND CAUTION In this Service Handbook each of three expressions DANGER WARNING and N CAU TION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning When servicing the relevant works disassembling assembling adjustment repair and mainte nance need to be conducted with utmost care N DANGER Actions having a high possibility of suffering death or seri ous wound N WARNING Actions having a possibility of suffering death or serious wound N CAUTION Actions having a possibility of suffering a slight wound medium trouble and material damage vii SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY WARNINGS 1 M
288. scarring the drum with tools or similar objects 5 not touch IC pins with your bare hands 1 1 ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS Adjustments including checks and settings are not only required when defective copy image occurs but also after replacing or reinstalling certain parts How to use the tables The following items are used in the tables throughout this section 1 Mode Indicates the adjustment mode P P mode 25 25 mode 36 36 mode 47 47 mode 2 Codes Indicates the applicable code and or Copy Quantity Setting button for each mode 3 Conditions New Indicates adjustment including check is required when replacing new part Reinstall Indicates adjustment including check is required when part has been re installed 4 Symbols used in the tables M ses Indicates there is priority sequence for adjustments including checks and settings Empty circle Indicates adjustments including checks and settings that can be carried out independently ADJUSTMENT LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Adjustment items Tray size setting PM count reset PM cycle set Charging grid voltage adjustment L detection adjustment Vertical magnification adjustment Printer Platen Vertical magnification adjustment RADF Horizontal magnification adjustment Platen Restart timing adjustment copier system Restart timing adjustment RADF Paper feed loop
289. sensor o Blower brush 7 Paper dust removing pad e Blower brush 8 Paper feed roller o Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 9 Separation roller e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 10 Double feed prevention roller o Drum cleaner Cleaning pad DB 208 Operational manhours of 1 unit X 3 DB 208A Operational manhours of 1 unit X 1 3 DB DB 208 DB 208A DB608 Every 100 000 copies or prints DB 608 Operational manhours of 1 unit X 2 Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace UBRO Check Supply Tools used ing cation ment 1 Externals 1 Externals 2 Paper feed 1 Paper feed unit removing section Note 2 Paper feed roller 25BA4032 e Q Drum cleaner Cleaning pad Note 3 Separation roller 54004056 Drum cleaner Cleaning Note 4 Double feed prevention roller Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 54004056 5 Gears Plus guard No 2 6 Paper feed unit installing 3 Externals 1 Externals o e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad Note For the DB 208A alone replace after 100 000 copies 4 FNS FS 109 Every 100 000 copies or prints Implementation classification No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Material used Hm Check Supply Tools used 1 Conveyance 1 Conveyance drive roller A Drum cleaner Cleaning pad section 2 Paper exit drive roller Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 4 5
290. sequence to removal DRUM UNIT 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Drum Caution 1 Caution 2 Caution 3 Caution 4 Caution 5 Caution 6 Caution 7 Be careful not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade with bare hands or damage these parts When removing and re installing the drum be careful not to hit the drum on the metal plate section of the cleaning blade When leaving the drum to stand be sure to place the drum cover over it and store it in dark place When installing the drum and cleaning blade regardless of the new or old parts apply setting powder to all of the drum surface and the both ends of the cleaning blade After applying setting powder to the drum carry out the following work before installing the drum unit into the main body To obtain the correct toner density clean setting powder leakage on the surface of the sensor on the toner control sensor board with an alcohol damped cloth When installing the drum be careful of the orientation of the drum The gear side of the drum is rear the side When installing a new drum be sure to enter code 91 1 of the 47 mode and reset the drum counter Then be sure to preform the charging grid voltage adjustment and PWM gamma patch adjustment For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service 3 E 2 Removal procedure Pull out the drum coupling shaft then fasten it with the lock lever Remove the drum
291. stance between the top of the side plate and the top of the tray is the same at both front and rear Metal scales Side plate Tray upper face 4 After adjustment is complete be sure to tighten the Set screw on the wire adjusting piece ADJUSTMENT OTHER 3 Image Distortion Adjustment 1 Tools required Screwdriver Phillips Pyramid chart A3 2 Adjustment Method Holes for screwdriver Set screws Adjustment screw rear side rear side V mirror unit Adjustment screw front side Set screws front side Step Operation procedure Measure the degree of image distortion in both Platen mode and ADF mode Note Measure the diagonal of the original being used beforehand Check the image distortion pattern either pattern FEE Transfer sheet Image distortion direction pattern Image distortion pattern B If the Platen modes is within specified range less than 0 3 to step 7 If not within specified range go to step 4 Turn the power switch OFF Note Always turn the power switch OFF other than during image output Remove the Left side cover Read cover right Read cover left Original stopper plate Original glass and Original glass 1 Move the V mirror unit to the left side 1 89 Step Operation procedure Adjust the image distortion Note When turning the screw
292. standard value 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the or BACK to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen 36 b ADJUSTMENT RADF restart timing adjustment Step Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 2 Timing adj key Timing adj screen Press 2 Restart timing key Restart timing adj screen Press the NEXT until the desired RADF adjustment item appears in the message display area Press the COPY Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper Then press the start button to make a copy Check the restart timing of the output paper Standard value Within 3 0 mm life size Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the restart timing adj screen Restart timing adj screen If the restart timing is different from the standard value enter a value from the numeric keys then press the SET to store the adjustment value Input range 50 slower to 50 faster 1 step 0 1mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing becomes the standard value 11 12 To adjust another adjustment item press the NEXT Jor BACK key to select the desired adjustment Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj scree
293. t the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press the start button to make a test copy Check the condition of skewing in the output copy Press the C button while pressing the P button to return to the paper loop adj screen Paper loop adj screen If the paper feed loop amount is not correct enter a value from the numeric keys then press SET key to store the adjustment value Input range 10 small to 00 standard to 10 large 1 step 0 5mm 10 Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the skewing condition is correct 11 To adjust another adjustment item press the or key to select the desired adjustment 12 Press the RETURN key to return to the timing adj screen 36 ADJUSTMENT Leading edge original erasure adjustment Adjust the leading edge original erasure leading edge blank cut amount Select the 2 Timing adj in the 36 mode menu screen then the timing adjustment menu screen will appear Select the 4 Lead edge timing on this screen then the leading edge original erasure amount adjustment screen will appear Caution If you reduce the erasure width a black line may appear on the leading edge of the paper when you make an enlarged copy Step Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press 2 Timing adj key Timing adj screen Press the 4
294. t the universal tray towards you 3 Loosen the two set screws in the center of the tray 4 Adjust the paper centering by moving the front and rear side guides back and forth 5 After adjustment is complete tighten the two screws and slide the universal tray back in place 6 Make another copy and measure the extent of paper centering 7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 until the extent of paper centering falls within the specified range 1 87 3 By pass tray centering By pass tray Adjusting screw Step Operation procedure 1 Make and measure the extent of paper centering 2 Loosen the adjustment screw and lower the by pass tray towards you 3 Adjust the paper centering by moving the guide back and forth 4 After adjustment is complete tighten the adjusting screw make another copy and measure the extent of paper centering 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the extent of paper centering falls within the specified range Extent paper Specified range Extent of paper centering Within 2 mm Main body Within 3 mm Full system Center of image Center of paper OTHER ADJUSTMENT 4 LCT tray centering DB 608 Fn Adjusting plate Centering adjustment RF plate front screw 9 Set screw Set screw P
295. t timing adjustment ADU No Menu No Sub menu Circular menu Summary of operation 1 High voltage adjustment None Charging voltage adjustment Adjustment in the field is inhibited Transfer current adjustment Separation AC voltage adjustment Separation DC current adjustment Charging grid voltage adjustment Developing bias adjustment Dmax correction L detection adjustment Performs L detection adjustment for the developer and registers the result in the nonvolatile memory Display the L detection adjustment value as the result when it is completed Reset the developing counter Automatic toner supply Adjustment in the field is inhibited 2 Timing adjustment 1 Drum clock Printer vertical magnification drum clock After making an adjustment print the SGU adjustment adjustment pattern No 16 Platen vertical magnification drum clock After making an adjustment make a copy adjustment Platen horizontal magnification adjustment RADF 50 vertical The same as 36 mode 8 RADF Adjustment magnification drum clock adjustment RADF 100 vertical magnification drum clock adjustment RADF 200 vertical magnification drum clock adjustment RADF 400 vertical magnification drum clock adjustment 2 Restart timing Restart timing adjustment After making an adjustment print the SGU pattern No 16 1 32 No Menu No Sub menu Circular menu 36 ADJUSTMENT Summary of operation
296. ta recorded in the machine Also it is possible for the collected data to be checked by KRDS and management listing Collecting data menu 1 Count data collection 2 Area data collection start Date count data Collecting data list Classification Contents Pre peration Collecting data Count number of 1 copies by each size Count RADF original feed quantities Collecting data Count of JAM 2 occurrence by each point Collecting data Count of copies by 3 each mode Collecting data Count of SC 4 occurrence Note 1 Enter the 25 mode l Select 1 Software SW Set the address to 8 7 1 Note 2 Note 1 default Note 2 Only collecting data 1 can be checked in For the setting method see 2 Setting software SW in 25 mode 1 25 ADJUSTMENT Procedures for checking collected data Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 4 Collecting data key Collecting data screen Press the 1 Count data key Count data screen Change the data number with the A key Pressing NEXT key enables display of next data collection screen Note 3 pamm Collecting data 1 Collecting data 2 Collecting data 3 Collecting data 4 paca Note 3 Press the RETURN to return to the data
297. talling the Optics Wire Caution 1 When winding the wire around the pulley be sure to run the wire tightly to ensure that it does not ride up the side of the pulley Caution 2 When reinstalling or replacing the optics wire be sure to use the optics position adjusting jig Caution 3 Be sure to perform image quality adjustment after replacing or reinstalling the wire For details refer to Adjustment section on Field Service 1 Insert the metal bead at the mid point of the optics wire front into the mounting hole of the drive pulley then wind four turns around the pulley to the outside and one turn to the inside starting this position a Use the optics wire marked F on the exposure unit mounting piece to the front side and to the rear side b Wind the optics wire so that the side with the metal bead at the leading edge is outside front rear of the pulley shaft c Wind the optics wire so that the side with the metal bead at the leading edge passes under the drive pulley 2 Provisionary fasten the wire to the drive pulley with a gummed tape so that the wire winding is not lost after that fix the pulley shaft to the frame with the bearings and E rings Pass the optics wire front of the metal bead side around the pulley 1 V mirror unit then pass it around the inside slit of the pulley 2 exposure unit Pass around the optics wire rear at the same procedure Remove the optics positi
298. te of the toner supply unit then open the toner supply unit to the paper feed side Lock plate Set screw Toner supply uni 3 E 1 Release the conveyance lever Remove the Transfer separation corona unit from the main body Refer to Corona unit Remove the one set screw holding the drum unit Set Er Drum coupling shaft Transfer separation corona unit Conveyance lever A Screws that must not be removed 5 Slowly pull the drum unit out careflly to the front Reinstallation procedure Make sure that the drum coupling shaft and the drum flange are correctly meshed Slowly insert the drum unit into the main body until the drum coupling shaft hit the drum shaft and it is pushed out slightly toward you When the drum coupling shaft andthe drum flange are not correctly meshed the drum coupling shaft hit the drum shaft and it is pushed out toward you Caution At this time do not squeeze the drum unit into the main body by force Also do not rotate the drum coupling shaft with the drum unit is squeezed into the main body With the drum coupling shaft is pushed out slightly toward you rotate the drum coupling shaft in the forwarding direction and mesh the drum coupling shaft and the drum shaft correctly Securely reinstall the drum unitto the main body and fix it with the set screw Reinstall the drum unit in the opposite
299. the APS detected size is also copied If this bit is set to 0 then the copier does erase the area outside of the original Note that in RADF copying the copier will always erase the area outside of the original regardless of this setting Automatic restart after paper supplied This setting determines how copying is restarted if the tray becomes empty while copying is in progress Under the default setting the user after adding paper and setting the tray back in place must press the START button to resume copying If this bit is set to 1 however copying restarts automatically when the tray is set back in place 8 5x11 APS Japan Europe A4 APS U S A If this bit is to 1 No the copier will forcibly copy as A4 in Japan Europe if it detects an original size of 8 5x11 and will forcibly copy as 8 5x11 in U S A if it detects an original size of A4 Under the default setting APS operates for both A4 and 8 5x11 25 ADJUSTMENT 18 Settings related to nonstandard original sizes SW21 5 Copy setting of platen small size A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller Selects whether to copy on the APS detected size when APS detected the original as A4 or smaller or to ignore the APS detected size and copy on A4 Japan Europe or 8 5 x 11 U S A SW21 3 U S A only Copy setting of platen small size 8 5 x 11 or smaller Selects whether to copy on the APS detected size when APS detected the original as 8
300. the P button Using the numeric keys enter the multi code Note1 5 Input check result will appear in the input check result display area 6 To check other signal input check repeat steps 2 to 5 Note1 Refer to 7 Input check code list 3 Output check method a Using the numeric keys enter the output check code of the load whose operation you wish to check b When use the multi mode press P button and enter the multi code according to the desired output check item load c Press the Start print button to perform the output check d Toendthe output check press the Stop Clear button Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 47 mode 2 47 mode menu screen Using the numeric keys enter the output check code Note2 3 When using the multi mode press the P button Using the numric keys enter the multi code Note2 5 Press the Start print button to perform the output check 6 To end the output check press the stop clear button 7 To make another output check repeat steps 2 to 6 Note2 Refer to 8 Output check code list 4 Exiting the 47 mode To end the 47 mode turn off the SW2 sub power 47 ADJUSTMENT 2 Initial Setting in the Field Each adjustment data is totally returned to the data value when the machine is delivered from the factory 3 Drum Count Reset When replaci
301. this bit is set to 1 non display however the advance and delete keys will not appear on the display so that it will not be possible to delete or reorder the reserved jobs 10 Destination switch Mode 5 0 5 1 Japan 0 0 U S A 1 0 Europe 0 1 Taiwan 1 1 11 Control temperature setting Mode 5 5 5 6 Normal control 0 0 Control temperature raised 10 C 1 0 Control temperature lowered 10 C 0 1 Normal control 1 1 12 Paper feed control for thick paper Mode 6 2 6 3 Ordinary 0 0 30PPM 1 0 20PPM 0 1 Ordinary 1 1 13 Polygon motor low speed rotation timing Use these bits to change the start timing of pre rotation following copy completion Mode 6 4 6 5 15 seconds 0 0 30 seconds 1 0 60 seconds 0 1 120 seconds 1 1 514 Polygon motor pre rotation selection Use these bits to set the speed of polygon motor rotation during idling state Mode 6 6 6 7 No pre rotation 49 606 3 rpm 0 Pre rotation 25 000 rpm 1 Stopped 0 1 15 16 17 Copy paper size priority in image area This setting determines how the copier handles platen copying when the original size differs from the copy paper size when the AMS setting is cleared If this bit is set to 1 whole page image in platen mode only then the copier will not erase the area outside of the original so that area outside of
302. tio R2 0 82 0 65 8 Arbitrary magnification 1 Zoom Maximum zoom Minimum zoom 9 2 2 22 23 AMS mode APS mode 2 2 2 2 By pass feed mode Book copy mode Frame erase mode Fold erase mode 2 2 3 3 0 1 4 AE mode 5 Interrupt mode 6 7 0 1 Image shift mode Reduction image shift mode 8 9 2 3 34 3 Thick paper mode 3 Thin paper mode No of paper feed quantities at intersheet mode blank paper interleave Number of feed in the OHP mode blank paper interleave 38 No of paper feed quantities at mixed original mode Access number of the JOB memory call mode Number of pressing the P button ADJUSTMENT No Contents 39 Number of times the auto low power mode is used 40 Number of copies with copy quantity set 1 41 Number of copies with copy quantity set between 2 to 5 42 Number of copies with copy quantity set 6 to 10 43 of copies with copy quantity set is set to 11 or above 44 of copies with Intersheet mode 45 46 Photo mode 47 48 Verti Horiz zoom mode 49 Memory copy mode 50 Single step mode 51 Text Photo mode 52 Text mode 53 Arbitrary density mode 54 Passage quantity with sheet Transparency copy interleave 55 Intersheet mode amp thi
303. tion Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS SAFETY CIRCUITS This unit incorporates the following electrical safety circuits to guard against the risk of accidents in case of any malfunction 1 Overall protection circuit 2 L2 L3 fixer heater lamps overheat protection circuit Operation principles of these safety circuits are described below It is necessary to understand this information fully in order to prevent mistakes during servicing 1 Overall protection circuit LBR 2 L2 L3 fixer heater lamps overheat protection circuit AC driver section Control 7 section 1 Software protection The output voltage of TH1 fixer temperature sensor 1 is constantly read by the CPU If the voltage becomes abnormal L2 fixer heater lamp 1 L3 fixer heater lamp 2 and RL1 main relay are set to OFF NCAUTION The clearance between the roller and 1 LBR line breaker protection When an excessively large current flows due to a short circuit in the AC line the AC line itself is instantly cut off due to the action of this circuit breaker NCAUTION The line breaker must not be disabled under any circumstances xi TH1 may not be altered
304. tion Service item Clean Lubri Replace Supply ay Mi ing cation ment ANS 1 Paper feed 1 Separation roller 54004056 Q section 2 Paper feed roller 25BA4032 two units 3 Double feed prevention roller 54004056 7 FNS FS 109 1 Periodic check Every 300 000 copies or prints Implementation classification Material used No Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Check Suppl ing cation ment dtd TORS 550 1 Paper exit 1 Paper exit drive roller A Tray 2 section 13LP 498 2 Paper exit drive roller A Tray 3 13LP 498 4 7 SERVICE B Actual Count Replacement Parts Classification Parts name Part number Actual count Drum cartridge Cleaning blade 55GA5601 100 000 include charging Charging wire 55FA2501 100 000 corona unit Charging control plate 55GA2507 100 000 Cleaner mount assembly 55GA 252 100 000 Charging wire cleaning block C 55GA 253 100 000 Charging wire cleaning block D 55GA 255 100 000 Transfer Separation charging wire 55GA2607 100 000 OPC drum 200 000 Separation claw 55GA 206 200 000 Developing unit Developer 200 000 Paper feed unit Tray 1 Separation rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 1 Paper feed rubber 25BA4032 100 000 Tray 1 Double feed prevention rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 2 Separation rubber 54004056 100 000 Tray 2 Paper feed rubber 2
305. to display the centering adjustment screen You can select the following adjustment from the NEXT and BACK keys RADF centering adjustment face side RADF centering adjustment back side Operation procedure Enter the 36 mode 36 mode menu screen Press the 8 RADF adj key RADF adj screen Press the 4 Centring adj key Centring adj screen Press the NEXT key until the desired item appears in the message display area Press the COPY key Basic screen Set the ADF adjustment chart on RADF then select A3 or 11 x 17 for the copy paper Then press the start button to make copies Compare skew of the copy against that of the original Standard value 3 mm less Press the C button while depressing the P button to return to the Centering Adjustment Screen Centring adj screen If the skew volume does not conform to the standard value enter desired value from the numeric keys then press the key to validate it Input range 74 in the front side direction of the center line through 74 in the back side direction of the center line 1 step 0 06 mm 10 11 Repeat above steps 5 to 9 until the skew meets the standard value You can proceed to adjustment of another item from the NEXT and BACK 12 Press RETURN to return to the RADF adj screen 1 67 36 ADJUSTMENT
306. trance guide plate upper and exit guide plate upper to 8 5 x 14 8 5 x 11 8 5 x 118 motor is always transmitted to the From reversal and conveyance roller A by the timing belt paper exit unit Applicable sizes of paper 1 Paper feed mechanism ADU paper feed operation is performed by the drive of the ADU paper feed motor M501 and three clutche control Refer to the drive system diagram Loop of paper Conveyance roller B clutch control Conveyance roller C clutch control torque limiter 1 The paper reversed at the reversal and paper exit section is fed to the inside of the ADU by 4 the conveyance roller To the paper feed section of the main body 2 The appropriate loop of the paper is formed by the clutch control that transmits the drive to the conveyance rollers B and C Paper is refed to the paper feed section of the main body when the drive is transmitted to the Registration roller clutch control registration roller via the registration clutch 2 M 1 ADU 2 Jam clearance mechanism There is a jam clearance mechanism on each of the conveyance section paper feed section and paper exit section Jammed paper can be removed by opening and closing the conveyance guide plate upper entrance guide plate upper and exit guide plate upper depending upon where the jam occurres
307. tray Related signal is PS32 upper limit detect 1 Operation a ONtiming M8 is turned ON by the SW101 to 104 paper size detection going ON b OFFtiming M8 is turned OFF by PS32 going ON Signals Input signals PS32 SIG PS32 to PFDB to PRDB Tray upper limit detection signal The paper in the tray is raised by M8 and when it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes H SIZE A B D SW101 102 103 10410 PFDB to PRDB Paper size detection switch ON OFF signal Output signals M8 DRIVE PRDB to PFDB to 8 8 drive control signal M8 ON H M8 OFF PAPER FEED UNIT 5 Paper Size Detection Control 5VDC VR1 ANG SIG SGND The size of the paper in the paper feed tray is detected as a result of the matrix circuit in the PRDB printer drive board detecting the signal from the PFDB paper feed detection board The size of paper in the by pass tray is detected by the PRDB according to the combination of PS27 paper size detection by pass and VR1 paper size detection by pass Operation a Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection The paper feed detection board has four switches which detect the position of the paper size detect actuators in the paper feed tray The paper size is detected according to the particular ON OFF combination of these switches The relation between the state of the switches on the paper feed detection board and the paper size is s
308. trols the separation corona unit output level DC bias component using analog signals from the PRDB S SHIFT DC output range 4to 10 V Separation DC bias voltage 0 to 300 uA output range 2 F 4 DEVELOPING UNIT DEVELOPING UNIT 1 Composition Developing unit cover Developing regulating plate Developing sleeve Agitator screws Developing sleeve Agitator wheel 2 Mechanisms Mechanisms Methods Developing 2 component developer Developing bias DC bias Developer agitation Main agitation Auxiliary agitation 1 Developing unit drive The developing unit is driven by the developing motor M3 The drive is transmitted from the developing drive input gear 1 to the agitation section The drive is transmitted from the developing drive input gear 2 via the developing MC2 to the developing sleeve Refer to the drive system diagram 2 G 1 DEVELOPING UNIT 3 M3 Developing Control SGND PS16 SIG 5VDC 24VDC MC2 DRIVE M3 developing is controlled by the PRDB Printer drive board Operation M3 is 24 V drive DC motor which drives the developing sleeve agitator wheel and agitator screw M3 is PLL controlled by feedback signals from speed sensor installed inside M3 itself maintaining it at a constant speed M3 goes ON after the specified time from when the Start button is pressed and goes OFF again
309. ue enter a value using the numeric keys on the Screen then press the key Standard value Drum designate value Indicated on the flange 5 V 0 lower 255 higher 1 step 1 6 V Input range 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the grid voltage becomes the standard value 8 To adjust another adjustment press the NEXT or BACK key to select the desired adjustment 9 Press the RETURN key to return to the 36 mode menu screen 36 ADJUSTMENT Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 36 mode 2 36 mode menu screen Press the 1 HV adjustment 3 HV adjustment screen Press the key until the L detection adj appears in the message display area 4 HV adj L detection adj screen Press the key then confirm that OK is displayed at RESULT and the L detection data value 5 To make another adjustment press the or BACK to select the desired adjustment 6 Press the RETURN to return to the 36 mode menu screen Caution an OK indication does not appear after Developing bias adjustment the developer has been agitated it means Developing bias adjustment is inhibited in the field that an L detection adjustment error has occurred In this case an error code will appear in the Result display area For Do not perform Dmax correction in the field the meaning of
310. um Dust proof 0 lens glass 2 D 1 WRITE UNIT 3 M5 Polygon Control POLY CONT POLY PLL LOCK POLY CLK 5 DRIVE 5 DRIVE 5 DRIVE 5 MAG C M5 MAG C 5 MAG 5 5 5 MAG A 12VDC SGND SCDB M5 polygon is driven by the PMDB Polygon motor drive board and is controlled by the SCDB scanner drive board Operation M5 is a 3 phase brushless DC motor which is driven using a 3 phase bipolar method The current flowing through the windings is switched according to the position of the rotor which is detected by a sensor magnetic sensor inside the motor This motor rotates the polygon mirror causing the laser beam from LDB lazer drive board to be scanned in the axial direction of the drum The speed of the motor is maintained constant by PLL control M5 is powered by 24 VDC The rotational speed is as follows State of the machine Rotational speed During copy 49606 3 rpm One of the following three speeds can be selected During idling using the 25 mode 49606 3 rpm 25000 rpm Stop f the item marked is selected the rotational speed of M5 switches over after the lapse of the specified time from the completion of the warm up or the end of the copy process The specified time can be selected using the 25 mode among below 15 sec 30 sec 60 sec 120 sec
311. unit from the main body Remove the charging corona unit and developing unit from the drum unit For the sequence of removing these parts refer to Corona unit and Developing unit Holding the both ends of the drum and lower the cleaning unit then shake the drum unit few times Check that the toner is not left between cleaning blade and toner collection sheet Release Drum coupling shaft Lock lever Gently lift out the drum while holding it at both ends to ensure that you do not damage the photosensitive surface DRUM UNIT b Reinstallation procedure Caution Push down both ends of the toner collection sheet towards you and confirm that the entire drum is in contact without any space 1 Remove the cleaning blade Refer to Cleaning toner recycle section 2 Apply setting powder into the entire surface of the drum 3 Install the drum to the drum casing and release the lock lever then lock the drum coupling to the drum flange 4 Remove the drum support tool from the main body and insert it into the drum gear side Drum support tool Set Sea A Drum support tool 5 Rotate the drum counterclockwise once 6 Rotate the drum clockwise a bit 3 E 3 7 Check that setting powder collected by the toner collec tion sheet remains on the surface of the drum to the both ends of the drum without a clearance Reverse direction Forward di
312. unt Cycle setting screen Select whether to reset the count in the PM count reset Press the 2 PM CYCLE Set key screen 4 PM Cycle set screen Enter PM cycle from the numeric keys Step Operation procedure Enter upper 3 digit hundred thousand ten Ener NG co MORE thousand thousand only 2 25 mode meng sereen 5 Press the SET to enter cycle that has Press the 3 COUNT CYCLE b sser 3 PM Count Cycle setting screen 6 Press the RETURN key to return to the PM Press the 1 PM COUNT reset key count cycle setting screen 4 PM Count rest screen Press the YES key to reset the PM count Press the NO or RETURN then the PM count is not reset and returns to the PM count cycle setting screen 2 Entering PM count start date When resetting the PM count itis necessary to input the start date and the screen below will appear automati cally Step Operation procedure 1 PM Count Starting Date Input Screen Enter a PM count start date from the numeric keys 2 Press the SET key to enter the data that has been entered 3 Press the RETURN key to return to the PM count cycle setting screen Caution When pressing the key without pressing the key the PM count start date is not changed It is necessary to reset the count again for inputting the count 5 Collecting Data This function enables viewing of the various da
313. unt adjustment Press the 6 Read point key Leading edge original erasure adjustment 4 Read point adj screen Centering adjustment Press the COPY key Original read point adjustment 5 Basic screen Set the new pyramid chart on the platen glass Step Operation procedure and select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper then press Enter the 36 mode the start button to make a test copy 36 mode menu screen 6 Make comparison between original image and test Press the 2 Timing adj key copy image Then check the image read point Timing adj screen Standard value Less 1 0 mm Press the 7 Factory default key 7 Press the C button while pressing the P button to Data recovery screen return to the read point adj screen Press the key until the desired item 8 Read point adj screen appears in the message display area If the image read point is different from the Press the YES to return the adjustment standard value enter a value from the numeric items to the standard values keys then press the SET key to store the When you press this key the timing adjustment adjustment value Screen re appears Input range 20 small to 20 large Press RETURN key then the set values 1 step 0 imm are not reset and return to timing adjscreen 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the image read point To reset another adjustment item repeat is within standard value steps 4 to 5 10 Press the RETURN key to return
314. urrs or nicks Check external covers and hinges for loosening or damage Check wiring for squeezing or damage Check power cord for insulation problems conduc tor must not be exposed Check power cord and cable ties etc for loosening from frame 2 3 4 5 N WARNING 1 Verify that the copier is properly grounded If a problem is detected establish a proper ground connection Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as listed below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock Unsuitable ground points Gas pipe Lightning rod Telephone line ground Plastic water pipe or water pipe or faucet that has not been approved by authorities for grounding use 2 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 3 Description of Safety Checks N CAUTION 1 Before performing safety check work read all rel evant documentation service handbook technical notices etc and proceed according to the pre scribed procedure using only the prescribed tools Do not carry out any adjustments not described in the documentation If the power cord is damaged replace it only with the specified power cord If the power cord insulation has been damaged and there are exposed sections short circuits and overheating may occur leading to a serious fire risk Do not route the power cord so that it can be stepped on or pinched Otherwise overheating may occur leading to serious fire risk Wh
315. ut work on the machine without reading these warning labels an unexpected accident may occur resulting in possible blindness DO NOT REMOVE these warning labels Do not remove caution labels If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled clean the label If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed please contact your Service Centre xiv SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS 7045 Copier Printer System Configurator Konica Machine and Accessories Description item Number Drawer Base w LCT DB 608 1 Tray 1 LC 950405 Memory 32 MB MU 403 Memory 64 MB MU 404 950218 Memory 128 MB MU 405 950219 Print Controller Item Description Item Number Ethernet Network Card KN 303 Hard Disk Drive HD 103 w Scanner A Supplied with copier Memory for engine and controller PS Kit PS 342 available late 4th Quarter Power Requirements NEMA 6 15R 115V 60Hz 15 AMP Outlet Dedicated Line Advised XV Supplies Description _______ Number _______ 950414 950412 Staples FS 109 95094 Cleaning Blade Filter S amp Filter H Chg amp Dischg Wires Material 1 amp 2 Collection Roller Assembly Assembly Block Key Counter Type Receptacie Holder item No Part Number Part Number 944907 021 0020 6011989 gt lt Compatibld U050 0120 Not
316. veloper never rotate the developing drive input gear 2 in the clockwise reverse direction direction Caution 3 After supplying new developer make sure to perform 36 mode L detection adjustment For details refer to Adjustment section in Field Service Place paper Developing drive 6 Reinstall the developing unit in the opposite sequence dicis input gear 2 to removal irection a Procedure ak Remove the drum unit from the main body Refer to Drum unit section Remove the developing unit from the drum unit 3 Releasethe hooks onthe developing unit cover then lift up and remove the cover BS Hooks Developing unit cover 3 G 2 DEVELOPING UNIT 4 Tiltthe developing unit so that the agitator screw side is downward then rotate the developing drive input gear 2 in the counterclockwise direction until all of the developer adhering to the inside of the developing unit and the developing sleeve is discharged 5 Wipe the developer remaining on the developing regu lation plate Developing regulating plate Agitator screws Rotate Developing drive input gear 2 6 Supply fresh developer evenly from the top of the agitator screw 7 Rotate the developing drive input gear 1 in the counterclockwise direction until all of the developer enters the inside of the developing unit Developing drive input gear 1 Toner
317. xes of the registration rollers upper lower PET sheets upper PET sheets lower 3 4 Remove the two set screws then remove the clutch retainer Remove the one E ring then remove the registration MCG MC1 Clutch retainer Set screw Registration MC E ring 5 Pull up the registration springs front and rear and expand its then remove the registration springs from the flange of each registration bearing upper Registration bearing upper Registration bearing upper Remove the two E rings and two registration bearings upper then remove the registration roller upper E ring Registration bearing upper uu Registration roller upper Registration bearing upper 3 J 7 PAPER FEED UNIT Remove the set screw then remove the roller knob Remove the E ring then remove the registration bear ing lower and the registration spring 7 8 E ring Set screw BS Gas Registration Registration spring bearing lower Roller knob 9 Remove the one E ring then remove the registration bearing lower and registration spring 10 Remove the registration roller lower from the 2nd paper feed unit Registration roller lower Registration bearing lower Registration spring PAPER FEED UNIT 11 Reinstall the registration rollers upper lower in the opposite sequence
318. xing paper exit roller lower Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 55GA5329 10 Paper exit pulley 54005322 e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 11 Fixing entrance plate lower e Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 55GA5320 12 Fixing entrance plate upper e Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 55GA5337 13 Fixing temperature sensor 2 e Roller cleaner Cleaning pad 55GA8842 14 Photo sensor 55208551 e Blower brush 15 Paper exit guide lower installing 16 Fixing upper cover installing 17 Fixing unit installing 15 Final check 1 Toner cartridge supply 9 2 W U T measure and check 3 Image check after changing consumables Necessary operation when replac ing the 200 000 copy materials 4 Copy sample check 5 PM counter reset 25 mode e 6 Leakage breaker reset e 7 Machine surroundings Externals e e Drum cleaner Cleaning pad 4 4 SERVICE 2 RADF DF 315 Every 100 000 copies or prints Implementation classification Classification Service item Clean Lubri Replace Materjal used ing creck cation ment Supply Tools used 1 Machine 1 Registration sensor mirror Blower brush inside 2 Registration sensor Blower brush 3 Read sensor reflection element e Blower brush 4 Read sensor o Blower brush b Switchback sensor mirror e Blower brush 6 Switchback
319. xt Press the NEXT Jor BACK key until PWM gamma Patch Gamma correction will appear in the message display area To end the adjustment press the RETURN key Note1 Note2 The START key can not be pressed on this screen Use the fine paper as a copy paper lf using the recycled paper such as yellow or colored paper the correction may not be performed correctly 36 ADJUSTMENT c Gamma correction Read the two test patterns that outputted in b SGU pattern print by scanner Step Operation procedure 1 After b SGU pattern print last adjustment item is completed correctly then press the NEXT Jor BACK key until PWM gamma Patch Gamma correction will appear in the message display area 2 SGU test pattern print screen Press the No 50 key pattern print on the original glass Note3 4 4 Press the START key to read the test pattern No 50 with the scanner Note5 3 Set the test pattern No 50 that outputted in SGU 5 Replace the original with No 51 that outputted in SGU pattern print and repeat step 3 and 4 Press key at step 2 Note3 When step 4 of No 51 is finished the correction data is started to calculate the normal completion or error is displayed When an error has occurred perform from again 6 Preform gamma curve preparation next Press the NEXT Jor BACK key until PWM gamma Patch Gamm
320. y adjustment 50 Vertical magnification adjustment of RADF 100 Vertical magnification of RADF 200 Vertical magnification adjustment of RADF 400 2 Restart timing RADF face side After making an adjustment make copy adjustment RADF back side 3 Paper loop adjustment RADF face side After making an adjustment make RADF back side 4 Centering adjustment RADF face side After making an adjustment make RADF back side 5 RADF scanner None Make an adjustment of density by letting density adjustment the machine read white chart 1 35 36 ADJUSTMENT 1 Setting Method special operating mode called 36 Mode has been provided with this machine This mode enables adjustment of the various parts 1 Turn the SW2 sub power OFF when the SW1 main power remains ON 2 Turnthe SW2 sub power ON while pressing 3 and 6 of the numeric keys 36 mode menu screen will appear on the LCD At this time normal copy operation is not possible 36 mode menu screen List print adjustment Timing A e E Running made A Jest pattern 5 Density adi adi 6 quality 3 Press the desired item key on the LCD screen Each setting screen will appear 4 Enter data in each setting screen 5 Press the RETURN key to check the data that have been entered 6 If necessary ch
321. y 2 1 Optics system abnormality 1 1 Image processing system 8 abnormality 25 F46 26 F46 Motor speed abnormality Fan lock abnormality Image control communication abnormality error in communication between overall control and image control Error code decimal number 25 ADJUSTMENT Error code decimal number No Classification Main code Sub code 86 5 89 90 91 92 93 3 94 95 F52 Fan lock abnormality 96 F81 Flash ROM abnormality 97 F60 11 RADF abnormality 98 F67 4 99 F70 11 FNS abnormality 100 F87 3 Printer board HDD abnormality Maximum count 9 999 Starting periodic date collection Reset the periodic data from the setting periodic collection start date Make date that this operation is performed as new periodic collection start date The periodic data can be checked with the KRDS and management list Step Operation procedure 1 Enter the 25 mode 2 25 mode menu screen Press the 4 Collecting data Collecting data screen Press the 2 Date count data Date count data screen 1

SERVICE MANUAL 7045

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents